POL00090452
POL00090452
POST V,
OFFICE
HORIZON
Introduction
to the
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 1
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
INTRODUCTION TO THE
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Glossary of Terms ©... 600000 nee
Introduction to the Horizon system: Objectives & Introduction ..
Section 1
Getting Started: Introduction ©0000... 000000 cc eee eee
Hardware overview 60... cc ee eee eee
Usernames & passwords .
Logon ........... .
System-forced change password .
Changing passwords
Logout 20... ee ee ee eee reer nee
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook L000 ooo oe ee ee
Section 2
The Desktop: Intreduction 20.00.00 00062 ce
The Desktop menu 2.0. ce eee
Moving to the Serve Customer menu .
The Serve Customer menu 2.00... ee cee
The Other Products menu... eee
Activity Sheet 2 Workbook 10000600000 coc ee
GICL
WORKBOOK 1
Page 1
HORIZON SYSTEM
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
OICL
WORKBOOK I
Page 2
HORIZON SYSTEM
Glossary of Terms
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
APS
BP
CA
CAP
CPP
CRN
CRU
DVLA
EPOSS
ESNCS
FAD
HFSO
HSH
HSUG
ICL
MOP
MVL
NINO
NS
OBCS
P&A
PLU
PMMC
POCL
POLO
SU
Glossary of Terms used in the Training Workbooks:
Automated Payment Service
Balance Period
Cash Account
Cash Account Period
Common Payment Package
Customer Reference Number
Cash Remittance Unit
Driver and Vehicle Licensing Agency
Electronic Point of Sale Service
Electronic Stop Notice Computer Service
Financial Accounts Division (of the Post Office)
Horizon Field Support Officer
Horizon System Helpdesk
Horizon System User Guide
International Computers Limited
Method of Payment
Motor Vehicle Licence
National Insurance Number
National Savings
Order Book Control Service
Pensions and Allowances
Primary Account Number
Product Look Up
Post Masters Memory Card
Post Office Counters Limited
Post Office Log On
Stock Unit
G1ch
WORKBOOK 1
Page 3
HORIZON SYSTEM
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
ich
WORKBOOK i
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizou System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION TO THE
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this Workbook, you will be able to:
1, Identify the hardware components which make up the Horizon system,
2. Get started on the Horizon system,
a. Logon to the Horizon system.
b. Change your password.
c. Logout of the Horizon system.
3. Use the menu icons to move around the Horizon system.
a. Describe the icons on the Desktop menu.
b. Use the icons to move from the Desktop to the Serve Customer menu.
¢. Describe the icons on the Serve Customer menu.
d, Describe the icons on the Other Products menu.
Introduction:
This Workbook is the first in a series of ten describing the actions and procedures for the
Horizon system.
This Workbook is divided into two sections. Section I describes the equipment components
which, when connected, make up the Horizon system. In addition to the equipment description,
this section takes you through the step-by-step logon procedure. Section 2 introduces you to
the three main menus and how you move around the menu system.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
At the end of each Workbook, in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
te the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
GICL WORKBOOK I
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Refs PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 1
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction te the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - GETTING STARTED
‘RODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the components that make up the Horizon system and the logon/logout
procedure.
The descriptions of the components are accompanied by pictures to make them easier to
recognise. The individual components connect and interact together to make up the Horizon
system.
Access to the Horizon system is controlled by usernames and passwords. These are an
important feature of system security, Usernames are used as part of the logon procedure, to
link transactions carried out by a specific user. Passwords are a security facility.
THE SYSTEM WILL FORCE YOU TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD EVERY 30
DAYS.
If you believe that someone else knows your password, you must change it immediately.
This section also explains how to change your password.
The flexibility of the Horizon system allows you to specify a password of your choice within
certain defined parameters. To prevent unauthorised access, passwords MUST NOT be
written down or revealed to anyone.
The outlet manager will be responsible for setting up users on the Horizon system after
installation. Workbook 9 details these procedures,
©ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 7
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
@ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page &
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Hardware overview Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Here is a brief description of the individual components that make up the Horizon system:
L. Processor
The processor is the brain of the Horizon
em. It stores and processes the information
passed to it.
2. Keyboard
The keyboard is one of the ways you
communicate with the processor. It consists of
six integral parts. These are:
a. Magnetic Swipe Card Reader - This enables
the processor to read and action the
information stored on the magnetic strips on
plastic cards.
b. Smart Card Reader - This allows the
Horizon system to process information
to/from smart cards.
Typing Area ~ This is based on a standard
typewriter keyboard.
d. Function Keys (or F Keys) - These keys
perform specific functions on the Horizon I
system.
e. Numeric Keys - These are numbered
keys 0 - 9 (including 00).
f{ Command Keys - These keys perform
specific commands on the Horizon system.
@ ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 9
HORIZON SYST
Section 1: Hardware overview, continued
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
3. Monitor
The monitor is used to display information. It
Jeoks the same as any other visual display unit
but has a touch screen facility. By touching
specific areas, you can carry out
procedures on the Horizon system.
There are two types of monitors used with the
Horizon system:
a. Standard monitor (shown above right)
b. Flat screen monitor (shown below right)
4, Bar-code Reader
The bar-code reader enables you to read and
record information from bar-codes onto the
Horizon system.
$. Counter Printer
The counter printer enables you to issue
receipts to your customers for items that they
may purchase, or records any payments that
you make to them.
e
ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1; Hardware overview, continued ee oT
6. A4 Report Printer
A single A4 report printer will be provided to enable you to print all the post office Ad reports
for stock and client balancing. There are two types of A4 report printer: the laser printer and
the inkjet printer. The anticipated volume of printing dictates the type of printer allocated to
the post office. Shown below are two types of A4 report printer currently in use with the
Horizon system.
EPSON Stylus 200
ene Inkjet Printer
PANASONIC
Laser Printer
When all the component parts are put together they form the Horizon system, pictured below.
‘THE HORIZON SYSTEM
ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section I: Usernames & passwords Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Before you can logon to the Horizon system, you will need to enter your username and
password.
A username and a password are required for operational and security reasons. They work in
conjunction with each other so that the person to whom they belong can be recognised on the
Horizon system.
You should note the following points about usernames and passwords:
Usernames
You will need to identify yourself when you logon. The system uses your username to control
what you can do, according to the requirements of your job. It allows you to access
information and to make any changes that you are authorised to do. It prevents you from
reading or accidentally changing anything else.
You must apply the following rules:
- NEVER allow anyone else to use your username - it is for your use only.
- Do not use, or attempt to use, any username that has not been issued to you.
Always logout from the system when you have finished for the day or if you leave the
counter for a period of time likely to exceed 15 minutes.
Your username will consist of six characters made up by the manager in the following
way:
~ Your first initial.
- The first two letters of your surname.
~ A three-digit number which will always be 001, unless there has been an identical
username created or in use on the Horizon system in last 12 months.
For example: Martin Taylor would be: MTAOOI
Michael Taylor would be: © MTA002
Michelle Tait would be: MTAO03
©ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 12
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction te the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1; Usernames & passwords Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Passwords
ALL users of the system must take responsibility for its security and passwords are
essential for that security.
Note:
There are a number of rules to follow when creating your password. A password must:
1, Be private, be selected by you personally and not be revealed to anyone else.
2, Be easy to remember.
3. Not be obvious or the same as your username: eg don’t use words like PASSWORD,
SECRET, car registration numbers or personal names.
4, Be changed immediately if allocated to you by someone else. For example when you are
first introduced to the system, or when you have forgotten your password and have been
issued a new one.
5. Contain a minimum of 6 characters and a maximum of 14 characters.
6. Contain a combination of letters and numbers eg POST 1234.
7, Be changed immediately if you suspect it has been compromised.
Note:
Never write your password down and make sure you are not being watched while you are
changing it.
‘The system will automatically prompt you to change your password after the first successful
logon and every 30 days thereafter, You cannot re-use a password you have previously used in
the last 12 months on the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 13
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section t: Logon
introduction to the Horizon System.
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
L
At the beginning of each individual counter session you will have to tell the Horizon system
that you wish to start the day's business. You do this by logging on, as described below:
From the Riposte Logo screen:
Touch the screen, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
2. Touch the OK green tick icon,
Enter name
we
Touch the Alphanumeric Keypad icon.
The Horizon system displays an
Agreement message. You must read the
message and acknowledge it by
selecting the appropriate icon.
The OK green tick icon or ENTER on
the keyboard will allow you to move on
to the next step in the logon procedure.
The Cancel red cross icon or Fi on the
keyboard will take you back to the
Riposte Logo screen.
The Enter name screen is displayed.
Name is highlighted in white in the
right-hand box.
On the left-hand side of the screen there
is an icon marked Alphanumeric
Keypad. If you activate this icon, an
alphanumeric keypad appears on the
screen.
CicL
WORKBOOK I
Page 14
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Logon, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Enter name box is displayed on the
screen, incorporating a full
alphanumeric keypad.
CUCM
rE ae
The system prompts you to enter your
username.
In the example shown below, the
username CAS0O1 will be used. If the
system you are using in the post office
is in Training Made, you will need to
obtain the username from the outlet
_ manager.
ae
S
Note:
Wherever there is a requirement to enter letters as part of a manual entry procedure,
there will always be an option to activate an alphanumeric keypad.
4, Type in your username (CAS001) using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric
keypad.
Cheek the username entered is correct before continuing.
35. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard to confirm your username.
Once you have confirmed your
username, the Enter password screen is
Pine igh ae
Seingie
ei orenreccrars i
displayed.
~ : GG The systern prompts you to enter your
2 ee 21 I password.
J) :
ne
3
Note:
If you have forgotten your password, inform your manager, who will issue you with a new
one (by using the modify a user procedure described in Workbook 9). If the manager is
unavailable, you must telephone the Horizon System Helpdesk on I
OICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 15
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Intreduction te the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Logen, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
6, Type in your password using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric keypad.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
If you enter your username or password incorrectly, the system will display the
following Error message: Invalid Name or Password supplied. Please try again.
Acknowledge the message by touching the green tick icon, or press ENTERon keyboard,
and then try the procedure again. After three unsuccessful attempts to logon to the
Horizon system, your account will be locked for 15 minutes. If this happ:
manager, or if they are not available, the Horizon System Helpdesk on
the
The Last logon screen is displayed.
This screen provides details of the time
and date when you were last logged on
to the Horizon system. It alse indicates
if you have had any failed logon
attempts.
Check the Failed Logons. Hthere are
any failed logons that you do not
recognise as having been carried out
by you, contact the Horizon System
Helpdesk on
6. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Once you have completed the logon
procedure, the main Desktop menu will
appear on the screen.
Well done!
You have logged on to the Horizon system.
SICL WORKBOOK I
Page 16
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Hy + Sy = pew; Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: System-forced change password Iseue: 2.0
During the logon procedure the Horizon system may display a message indicating that your
password has expired. This will happen after the first use of your username and password and
every 30 days thereafter.
Immediately after entering your password and activating the green tick icon, the following
screen will appear:
The Password Expired screen is
displayed.
‘The message indicates that your
password must be changed before the
logon procedure is complete.
You must therefore acknowledge the
message and enter a new password,
1. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The New Password screen is displayed.
You must enter a new password
incorporating the password
requirements stated on page 13.
2. Type in your new password using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric keypad.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: System-forced change password, continued
Date: 29/07/99
lissue: 2.0
The Confirm Password screen is
displayed.
You must re-enter your new password.
4. Type in your new password using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric keypad.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
if the two passwords you have entered are identical, the logon procedure will continue
normally with the Last logon message displayed. If the two passwords are different, then the
following message is displayed ‘Error. Re-entered password does not match new password’.
Acknowledge the message and re-enter your password.
6, Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Desktop menu is displayed. You will be required to carry out the same procedure every 30
days.
Well done!
You have changed your password using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 18
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Intreduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Coat, Date: 29/07/89
Section 1: Changing passwords ia Tseuet 20
If, for any reason, another person knows your password, or you suspect that it may have been
compromised, you must change it immediately.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon,
The Old Password screen is displayed.
e The system prompts you to enter your
ms old password.
I
/
i
4, Type in your old password using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric keypad.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Once you have confirmed your old
password, the New Password screen is
> displayed.
s
©1CL WORKBOOK 1
Page 19
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System
Section 1: Changing passwords, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/602
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
8. Type in your new password a second time.
10. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon,
Well done!
6. Type in your new password using the keyboard, or the on screen alphanumeric keypad.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Once you have typed in your new
password, the system will then display
the Confirm New Password screen.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Tf the two passwords you have entered
are identical, then the system will
display the Password changed screen.
If the passwords you have entered do
not match, an error message ‘Password
and confirmed Password do not match”
will appear. In this instance touch the
green tick icon, or press ENTER on the
keyboard and retry the procedure.
9. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
or Press HOME on the keyboard.
You have changed your password using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 20
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Si : Date: 29/07/99
ection 1: Logout Issue: 2.0
When you want to leave the post office for the day, or for a period of time likely to exceed 15
minutes, you must logout of the Horizon system.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Logout icon, P 4 or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The system will now ask you to confirm whether you want to logout of the Horizon system.
2. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
If you decide you do not want to logout, you can abort the logout procedure by Touching the
Abort red cross icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Riposte Logo screen is now displayed. This means you have successfully logged out of
the Horizon system.
3. You should now switch the monitor off.
Well done!
You have logged out of the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 21
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section I:
Intreduction te the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/97/99
Issue: 2.0
SiIcL
WORKBOOK 1
Page 22
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref PATH/43/002
Date: 29/67/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Warkbook I
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read section I again.
1. What are the names of the three Horizon system components shown below?
nN
. How many integral parts are there on the keyboard?
3. What is sometimes referred to as the brain of the system?
4, Which component enables you to print receipts for the customer?
5. What does the magnetic swipe card reader do?
6. Namie two occasions when you would change your password.
© ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 23
HORIZON SYSTEM
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
@1CL
WORKBOOK 1
Page 24
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 2 - THE DESKTOP
INTRODUCTION
introduction:
Whenever you have completed the Jogon procedure on the Horizon system, you will always
enter the system at the Desktop menu.
This section introduces you to the Desktop, Serve Customer and Other Products menus. It also
explains the process for moving around the Horizon system from menu to menu.
©ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 25
HORIZON SYSTEM
Introduction to the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
©1CL
WORKBOOK I
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Desktop menu Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
When you have successfully logged onto the Horizon system, the Desktop menu is displayed.
‘This menu is the top level of the Horizon system, and there are a number of options you can
select from it, depending on the level of access you have been granted by the manager.
Horizon system Desktop menu
Bringby
Cee,
F Key number
tor Command Key)
for keyboard operation
Name of product
or function
On the Desktop menu, you will see a number of pictures in boxes. Each of these pictures
represents an icon, Activating an icon by Teuching it (or Pressing the corresponding F key or
command key on the keyboard) will allow you to move to another menu associated with that
icon, to sell a product, or to carry out a specific function on the Horizon system. There are
three other symbols that you may see superimposed on an icon, they are:
Q If an icon has a padlock symbol superimposed on it, you cannot access the function
(2) with your level of access.
if an icon has three dots in the top left-hand comer, there is a submenu (another
Son menu group) associated with the icon.
the function but you are carrying out a procedure on the system which is preventing
you from accessing the function.
I) if an icon has a no entry symbol superimposed on it, you normally have access to
OICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Intreduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Desktop menu, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
You will have already used the Administration icon to change your password (pages 19 & 20).
This section describes the other icons displayed on the Desktop menu, and the procedure for
moving from the main Desktop to other submenus in the menu hierarchy.
Transactions (F1)
This icon allows you to navigate to the next level menu in the menu
hierarchy (Transactions).
Reports (F2)
This icon allows you to access both daily and weekly reports, for the post
office as a whole and for individual counter positions.
Token Mgmnt (F3)
This icon is used to access all the management features for the OBCS
(Order Book Control Service),
Steck Balancing (F4)
This icon is used to access the menus for declarations of stamps, stock and
cash. Summaries of reports and discrepancies may also be viewed from
this icon group.
Temp Lock (FS)
This icon temporarily secures the system. To re-activate the Desktop, you
need to re-enter your password.
End of Day (F6)
This icon marks the end of the current day’s business.
Administration (F7)
This icon is used to access the Administration functions of the Horizon
system. You can modify Users, Stock Units and passwords from the
Administration icon submenu. Some functions on this menu are only
available to users with manager access level to the system.
Office Balancing (F8)
This icon is used to access the Cash Account (CA) Report functions.
Office Balai Inactive Stock Units can be rolled over from an icon in this group. Only
managers or supervisors can access this menu.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Desktop menu, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Memos (F11)
This icon allows you access the Message Broadcast Service. This is a
facility whereby urgent messages can be sent to post offices from a central
location. This facility is currently not available.
Training (F12)
This icon allows you to switch between the Training Mode and Live Mode
of operation for the Horizon system. All receipts produced in Training
Mode are clearly marked ‘Training’. The screen colour will also change.
Node Info (F14)
This icon provides information for a specific Horizon counter position.
The Help Desk may require this information if there is a problem with the
system.
Engineer (F15)
This icon is used when an engineer visits your post office. They will use
this icon to carry out various tests on the Horizon system.
Logout (F16)
This icon is used to logout from the Horizon system, either when you have
te finished for the day or if you are leaving the counter position for a period
of time likely to exceed 15 minutes. If you are leaving the counter position
to serve at the parcel hatch or to obtain a form, the Temp Lock (FS)
function should be used.
Bin (Del)
This icon is used to delete a sale icon in the stack on the right-hand side of
the screen, before the sale is completed. With the exception of Automated
Payment (AP) transactions, any sale icon showing in the stack may be
removed by first touching the Bin icon and then the sale item.
Info (Hip)
The Info icon will enable you to find out additional information about the
function of a particular icon, field or panel, should you need it.
Susp
The Suspend icon can be used at any time during the operation of the
system to suspend a session or transaction. Once activated, the icon title
will change to Swap and when activated a second time, it will return you to
the original transaction.
©ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
. 4 ih
Section 2: The Desktop menu, continued sands
1. Touch the Info icon, or Press HELP on the keyboard. The on screen Info icon fades, then
reappears after a few seconds.
2. Touch the Info icon, or Presy HELP on the keyboard again and immediately Touch the
Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
You will see a yellow speech bubble that
explains the operation of the Transactions
icon activated,
Once you have noted the information, Touch
the speech bubble or Re-Press the HELP
button. The bubble will disappear and the
Info icon will return to its normal state.
Touch this button to
display the
Transactions menu
This button navigates
down a level,
utara
3. Touch the yellow speech bubble, or Re-Press HELP on the keyboard.
‘On the right-hand side of the screen you will also notice a clock and
calendar. The date, time, Balance Period (BP) and Cash Account Period
(CAP) details will be automatically updated by the Horizon system.
If you return to this menu with an incomplete transaction, the display is
replaced by the transaction stack.
Stoke AS
(isos CASIO
CAP 2s EP D1
© ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Moving to the Serve Customer menu pate,
The Desktop menu is always displayed when you first logon to the system. To display other
menus, you have to navigate through the system from the Desktop. On the Desktop menu you
can see there is an icon for Transactions.
1. Touch the Transactions icon,
The Transactions menu is now displayed. The icons on this menu and their use are described in
subsequent Workbooks. In this example you need to navigate past the Transactions menu to get
to the Serve Customer menu.
2. Touch the Serve Customer icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Serve (
You have now navigated two levels down from the original Desktop menu to the Serve
Customer menu. The display shows the two levels:
Transactions tat It Level
Ind level »——-» Serve Customer
All counter sales can be processed from the Serve Customer menu or frorn other menus
accessed from it.
You can return to the main Desktop at any time by Touching the
Riposte Desktop icon, or by Pressing HOME on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 31
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Serve Customer menu Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
All customer sales can be made from the Serve Customer menu or menus accessed from it,
Once you access this menu and register and finish sales, the Horizon system will always return
to the Serve Customer menu. To navigate back to the main Desktop menu you can Touch the
Riposte Desktop icon at the top left-hand corner of the screen or you can Press HOME on the
keyboard.
This section provides a brief description of the Serve Customer menu icons and their use.
Serve Customer menu
eee eS Ee
Quantity
This icon will allow a quantity to be set before sale of an individual item
from the Serve Customer menus. The icon will always display I as a
default. You will set quantities for sales later in the EPOSS sections.
Ist class stmp (FI)
This icon records the sale of Ist class stamps.
2nd class stmp (F2)
This icon records the sale of 2nd class stamps.
Postage stmp (F3)
This icon allows you to set the Amount of other value postage stamps sold.
ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Serve Customer menu, continued ote
Stamp Books (F4)
This icon accesses the Stamp Books menu.
ramp Books
TV stmp £2 (FS)
This icon records the sale of £2 TV Stamps.
BT stmp £2 (F6)
This icon records the sale of £2 BT Stamps.
Postal Orders (F7)
This icon accesses the Postal Orders menu. Postal Orders ~ Sales &
Encashment.
Lecal Schemes (F8)
This icon accesses the Local Schemes menu for Travel Schemes, Home
Care, Meals on Wheels, Rent Cards, Electricity Schemes ete.
Colour TV lie (F9)
This icon records the sale of a Colour TV Licence.
BT bill pymt (F10)
This icon is used to register all BT payments.
T cash gire (FIL)
This icon is used to register Alliance and Leicester Transcash payments.
Green giro (F12)
This icon is used to register Green giro payments.
WORKBOOK 1
Page 33
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Serve Customer menu, continued Dates ov “
Other Products (F13)
This icon accesses the Other Products menu.
N Ereland (Fi4)
This icon accesses the Northern ireland menu.
Cash (F1S)
‘This icon will register the transaction immediately if the customer has paid
the full amount with the correct cash (bypassing the Settlement menu).
Functions (F16)
This icon accesses the Horizon system Functions menu.
GCL
WORKBOOK 1
Page 34
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Other Products menu Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Serve Customer menu allows you to select certain Post Office products directly from the
menu. However all products, including those on the Serve Customer menu, may be selected
via the Other Products menu.
From the Serve Customer menu, Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
Other Products menu
P and A (FI)
This icon accesses all the functions related to Pensions and Allowances.
National Savings (F2)
This icon accesses all the National Savings functions.
Girobank (F3)
This icon ace
including Trans
Handling service).
s related Alliance & Leicester Girobank sales items
h, Premium Bonds & Business Accounts (Cash
Utilities (F4)
This icon accesses BT bill payments & APS manual payments.
@ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 35
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM fatroduction to the Horizon System: Ref: PATH/M43/002
Section 2: The Other Products menu, continued ee
Saving Stamps (F5)
This icon accesses the Saving Stamps menu for sales of TV, MVL, Water,
BT and Gas saving stamps.
Leisure (F6)
This icon accesses the Leisure menu for Littlewoods and National Lottery
sales & prizes and Active life subscriptions.
Travel (F7)
This icon accesses the Travel menu for all travel-related items including
passport applications and travel insurance.
Pers Finance (F8)
‘This icon accesses Personal Finance-related payments and products
including Other Banks’ cheques, Personal Banking deposits & withdrawals
etc.
Scales (F9)
This icon accesses all Postal Scales items including Post Inland, Post
Europe and Post International.
Mail Products (F10)
This icon accesses the Mail Products menu for sales of Stamps, Stamp
Books, Special Stamps, Philatelic Sales, Priority & Ordinary Stationery etc.
Retail (F11)
This icon accesses the Retail menu for commemorative coins and, under
the Counters Rev icon, all sales shop items including Greeting Cards,
Postcards & Calendars. (Only for use at Branch Offices)
Licences (F12)
This icon accesses the Licences menu for sales of TV, MVL, Fishing and
Game Licences.
Mobiles (F 13)
‘This icon accesses the Mobiles menu for ‘phone-related items.
@ICL WORKBOOK 1
Page 36
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction to the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: The Other Products menu, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Phonecards (FI4)
This icon accesses the BT Phonecards menu.
Postal Orders (F15)
This icon accesses the Postal Orders menu.
Prey (Esc)
This icon will return the user one step backwards in the menu navigation
process. From the Other Products menu, you would return to the Serve
Customer menu.
This section has given you a brief overview of the menu structure, starting from Desktop down
to the Serve Customer and Other Product menus. Don’t worry at this stage if you can’t
remember where all the products and services can be accessed. Remember if you touch an icon
and the product or service you require is not displayed under that group, you can use the Prev
icon to move backwards to the previous menu, and try again.
ich WORKBOOK 1
Page 37
HORIZON SYSTEM
introduction te the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issne: 2.0
ich
WORKBOOK I
Page 38
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Introduction te the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 2 Workbook 1
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read section 2 again. Some of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. Which on screen function can be used to provide additional information about the menu
icons?
2. Tf an icon has a padlock symbol superimposed on it, what does this mean?
3. How do you return the Horizon s
stem to the Desktop menu?
4. If you prefer to operate the keyboard, how do you activate the relevant icons?
5. Apart from the calendar and clock, what other information can be found in the stack?
6. Navigate from the Desktop to the Other Products menu,
7. Return the display to the Desktop menu.
®ICL WORKBOOK I
Page 39
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POST y,
OFFICE
HORIZON
EPOSS 1
Electronic Point Of Sale Service
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
EPOSS I
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
EPOSS 1: Objectives & Introduction .............
Section 1
Settlement: Introduction
The Settlement menu... 6.0. ee eee
Section 2
Introduction to EPOSS: Introduction
Single stamp sales
Saving stamp sales
Saving stanip sales using the Bin function ..
Fixed price sale item (mixed payment) . .
Postal Order sales
Postal Order sales with stamps
Priority stationery sales . - es a
Ordinary stationery sales ©... 0.
Parcel services transactions
ices transactions
@1CL
WORKBOOK 2
Page I
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 1
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Gite
WORKBOOK 2
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
{issues 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS I
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this Workbook you will be able to:
. Describe the Settlement options of the Horizon system.
. Complete single and multiple EPOSS transactions using the Horizon system.
. Complete EPOSS transactions using the Quantity & Bin functions.
, Complete EPOSS transactions by registering a mixed payment.
, en ie
Introduction:
‘This Workbook is the first in a series of three describing the actions and procedures for the sale
of, and payment for, post office products and postage items using the EPOSS (Electronic Point
Of Sale Service} function of the Horizon system.
This Workbook is divided into two sections. Section 1 describes the Settlement menu and the
options available to the customer when paying for the products purchased. Section 2 describes
some single sale transactions to familiarise you with the Horizon system menus and then
progresses to multiple sales from the same menu groups.
if you need to reverse a transaction for a customer or if you completed it incorrectly at the
counter, refer to the procedures for reversing transactions described in Workbook 7.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these (raining examples in the pest office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
ise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up te date price information.
©1cL WORKBOOK 2
Page3
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS I
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL
WORKBOOK 2
Page 4
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
EPOSS 1
SECTION 1 - SETTLEMENT
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This
section describes the options ava
Payments from you to the customer will be in cash.
ction introduces you to the Setdement options of the Horizon system. At the end of
most transactions there is a settlement from the customer, or from you to the customer. This
ilable to the customer when paying for the products purchased.
OIL WORKBOOK 2
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS tf
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
OIL
WORKBOOK 2
Page 6
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 1: The Settlement menu Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Before you conduct any transactions it is important to understand the Settlement functions of
the Horizon system and their use. At the end of most transactions, there is normally a
settlement with the customer. On these occasions the Horizon system displays a Settlement
menu screen. You can select the method of payment offered by the customer from this menu.
This section describes the Settlement menu icons and their use. Mixed payments can also be
made using the settlement menu, eg if the customer wishes to pay part of the transaction with
saving stamps and the outstanding balance with cash, this is supported by the settlement facility.
Note:
Only certain methods of payment are acceptable for each sale, eg a customer cannot
redeem gas stamps against a water bill payment. The standard methods of payment are
in accordance with current post office procedures for each product.
The initial example in this section starts from the Functions menu. In later examples the
Settlement menu will be displayed automatically when the Finish icon or the ENTER key is
activated. After each sale is completed the Horizon system will automatically return to the
Serve Customer menu.
From the Desktop menu, select Transactions, then select Serve Customer.
1. Touch the Functions icon,
or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed.
From this screen you can accept a
variety of methods of payment.
I Remember the customer can mix the
methods of payments offered (within
current post office rules) to meet the
total settlement amount.
I
I
I
You can return to the Serve Customer
menu by activating the Riposte Serve
Customer icon at the top left-hand
corner of the screen.
ee
Soo Same
All the icons on this menu allow a certain type of payment to be made for a sale item. If a
mixture of payments is made for certain supported items you will need to use more than one
icon from the menu to finish the sale. If stamps or vouchers are redeemed a st a sale, the
Horizon system only allows payments specific to the redemption rules.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page?
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: The Settlement menu, continued ote
Here are further details about individual icons from the Settlement menu and their specific use:
Cash (FD
This icon is used when the payment offered is the correct amount in cash.
Cheque (F2)
This icon is used when the correct payment is offered as a cheque.
Cheques can only be accepted for those products stipulated in current POCL
procedures,
Cash (F3)
This icon can be used when the payment offered is in cash but change is
required, eg a £5 note is offered as payment for product sales totalling
£2.17.
Toe Cheque (F4)
This icon can be used when the payment offered is a cheque which does
q not meet the full amount, eg the product cost totals £112 and the customer
wants to pay £100 by cheque and the remainder in cash. Cheques can only
be accepted for those products stipulated im current POCL regulations.
Gire transfer (F5)
This icon can be used when full or part payment for a product is made by
Giro transfer,
Vouchers (F6)
‘This icon can be used when vouchers are an acceptable form of payment
for the product,
Debit Card (F7)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is made by debit card.
BT stmp rdm (F9)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
the product narned on the icon.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 8
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: The Settlement menu, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
TV stmp rdm (F16)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
the product named on the icon.
Water stmp rdm (F11)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
the product named on the icon.
MVL stmp rdm (F12)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
motor vehicle licences. If you are not an MVL office, you will not be
allowed to access this icon.
Gas stmp rdm (F13)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
the product named on the icon.
Elee stmp rdm (F14)
This icon can be used when full or part payment is offered in stamps for
the product named on the icon.
You must observe Post Office regulations on the sale of stock iterns and rules for payment
when you are accepting settlement,
3. Touch the Riposte Serve Customer icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard
The system now returns to the Serve Customer menu.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 9
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 1
POL00090452
POL00090452
Refi PATH/43/002
Date: 2907/99
Issue: 2.0
Och
WORKBOOK 2
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS I Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORTZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 1
SECTION 2 - INTRODUCTION TO EPOSS
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section will introduce you to the actions and procedures for the sale of, and payment for,
post office products and postage items, using EPOSS (Electronic Point Of Sale Service).
The section begins with some single sale transactions to familiarise you with the Horizon
system menus, The section then progresses to multiple sales from the same menu groupings.
In addition to actual sales, the Horizon system provides functions to assist you in the sales
process, and these functions are used and explained in the examples.
®ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page li
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS I Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 12
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS Ref: PATH/43/002
wa. ee alec Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Single stamp sales Issue: 2.0
‘The following transactions are all for the sale of fixed price items using the Horizon system.
All EPOSS transactions will start from the Serve Customer menu and will progress to the
payment method used by the customer.
From the Desktop menu, select Transactions, then select Serve Customer.
The Serve Customer menu is displayed.
Some of the icons on screen have a
lower level menu, indicated by the three
white dots in the top left-hand corner of
the icon.
ad
You can register the sale of five products directly from this menu:
~ First and Second Class stamps
- £2 BT stamps
~ £2 TV stamps
~ Colour TV Licence Fees.
In this examiple the customer wishes to purchase a single [st Class Stamp.
1. Touch the ist class stmp icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
After the icon has been touched, the sale is logged and the sale and
price registered at the bottom right of the screen. This visual
display of the product sold is referred to as the ‘sales stack’
Note:
Products viewed in the stack are not registered with the
Horizon system as a completed sale at this point in the
oo transaction process.
j26 Notice the Finish icon tells you to ‘TAKE £0.26 from the
customer.
2. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@1CL WORKBOOK 2
Page 13
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Single stamp sales, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
The Settlement menu is displayed automatically and you can now select the method of payment
offered by the customer.
In this example the customer has tendered the correct cash.
3. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The action of selecting the method of payment completes the sale and the Horizon system
returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Remember you can complete the sales of Ist and 2nd Class stamps, Colour TV licence fees, £2
TV and £2 BT saving stamps directly from this menu.
Note:
In this example the product required was obtained from the Serve Customer menu. As
the customer paid with the correct amount in cash, the Cash icon (F15) should have been
used to complete the sale. This icon is ONLY available on the Serve Customer menu. If
during the sale you move to any other menu, the Finish icon or Press ENTER on the
keyboard should be used.
Weil done!
You have completed the sale of a single stock item using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page i4
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Saving stamp sales using the Quantity function Date ees
This exercise describes the sale of items using the Quantity function of the Horizon system. If
a customer requests several items with the same fixed cost, it would be unrealistic and
time-consuming to keep Touching the screen or Pressing the keys to reach the correct number
required. The Quantity function of the Horizon system allows you to set the amount required
before activating the icon for the product.
In this Quantity function example, the customer has requested the following items:
6 x £5 MYL saving stamps.
From the Serve Customer menu:
Notice that the Quantity icon will always display the figure 1 as a default.
1. Touch the Quantity icon,
I The Enter Quantity screen is displayed.
The system prompts you fo type in the
quantity required.
On the right-hand side of the screen you
‘an see that there are two services
offered from this menu, Quantity &
Shopping Mode.
The service selected is highlighted in.
white, Qty in this example. The
Shopping Mode is covered in
Workbook 7 - Functions.
As with other Amount entry screens, you can either use the on screen keypad to enter in the
amount required, or you can use the keyboard.
2. Type 6
Check the quantity entered is correct before continuing.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Horizon system has returned to the Serve Customer menu. Notice, however, that the
Quantity icon is now displaying the number 6. Any fixed price item selected will automatically
be multiplied by 6.
Note:
You can set the quantity prior to the sale of an item by simply typing in the number
required using the keyboard WITHOUT activating the Quantity icon.
4, Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
GCL WORKBOOK 2
Page 15
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS i Ret: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Saving stamp sales using the Quantity function, continued
Date: 290799
issues 2.0
or Press FS on the keyboard.
I The Saving Stamps menu is displayed.
There i son for the sale of MVL
saving stamps.
6. Touch the MVL simp icon,
Although the icon was activated only once for this item, the icon in the sales stack, shown
below. has ‘ered a sale for a total cost of £30. The Quantity icon has also re-set to its
default value of 1, If further multiple sales were required you would have to re-enter the
quantity for the relevant amount.
MVL STAMP SALE ICON
QUANTITY OF ITEM SALE!
(TEM (5) MULTIPLIED
BY THE PRE-SET QUANTITY OF 6
“TOTAL COST OF QUANTITY SALE.
7. Touch the F
sh icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this sale item example:
8. Touch the Cash icon. or Press Fl on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu,
Well done!
You have completed a sale using the Quantity function of the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 16
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Saving stamp sales using the Bin function Pate: 2007
Occasionally, a customer may change their mind when requesting a sale item, or you could
Touch the wrong icon by mistake. You can delete any sale item in the sales stack using the Bin
function (with the exception of APS transactions, refer to Workbook 6). If, however, the
transaction session has been completed and settlement made, you must reverse the transaction
to rectify the error (refer to Workbook 7 for Reversals). The following example demonstrates
the use of the Bin function.
In this example the customer has requested the following items:
1 x £2 TV Saving Stamp
- x £2 BT Saving Stamp
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the TV Stamp £2 icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
2. Touch the BT Stamp £2 icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
Both sale items have now appeared in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen and
the total of the two items requested is displayed in the Finish icon, (£4 in this example ). The
customer realises at this stage that they do not have sufficient funds for both items and now
only wants the £2 BT stamp.
As the sale has not yet been completed, you can delete the £2 TV Stamp from the sales stack.
3. Touch the Bin icon, or Press DEL on the keyboard.
As you can see, the Bin icon fades when you Touch it, then remains shaded for 3 to 7 seconds,
after which it returns to its normal state. To delete an item from the sales stack. you must
Touch jt while the Bin icon is in its faded state. Allow the icon to restore.
4. Touch the Bin icon, or Press DEL on the keyboard.
Within seven seconds:
5. Touch the £2 TV icon in the sales stack, or Press T2 on the keyboard.
‘This time as you touch the T
remains in the sales stack. The total displayed in the Finish icon als
total, and is now showing £2. You can complete the sale.
tamp £2 icon, it is deleted and only the £2 BT Stamp icon
so reflects the sale value
6. Touch the Finish icon. or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this sale item example:
3. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu,
Weil done!
You have completed a sale using the Bin function of the Horizon system,
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Fixed price sale item (mixed payment)
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The following transaction is for the sale of a fixed price item from the Serve Customer menu.
In the following example, your customer wishes to purchase a Colour TV Licence and pay £80
by cheque, with the balance in cash.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Colour TV lic icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
As this is a fixed price item, the last action causes the sale to be registered in the sales stack on
the right-hand side of the screen. This is the only item requested by the customer.
2. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Settlement menu is displayed, and you can now specify the method of payment offered by
the customer using the relevant icon.
3. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to type in the amount of the cheque
offered as part payment.
4, Type £80.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
You can see that there are now three icons displayed in the sales stack
on the right-hand side of the screen. The top icon is the fall cost of the
sales tern (in this example £101 for a Colour TV licence), The centre
icon displays the amount deducted from the total payment by the
cheque (note that this is highlighted in yellow because it has been
received from the customer). The Finish icon at the bettom displays
the outstanding amount still required to complete the transaction.
Note:
Ifa cheque is offered as full or part payment, all carrent POCL regulations regarding the
acceptance of cheques at the counter still apply.
GCL WORKBOOK 2
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS L Ref: PATH/43/002
. . : . . Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Fixed price sale item (mixed payment), continued Issue: 2.0
As the sale has still to be completed, the Settlement menu is still displayed. The customer
decides to pay the outstanding balance with the exact amount in cash.
6, Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale ef a fixed price item accepting a mixed payment, using the
Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 19
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS I Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Postal Order sales Dates 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
This example deals with the sale of Postal Orders. The fees on Postal Orders are added
automatically to the value of the Postal Order selected. Again, this transaction will be
completed from the Serve Customer menu.
In this example the customer has requested a £5 Postal Order. You have seen that similar
products are grouped together on the same menu.
Postal Orders are grouped under the Postal Orders icon.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Postal Orders icon,
RSENS
<& ‘Wencadions.
I or Press F7 on the keyboard.
“I ‘The Postal Orders menu is displayed.
Select the specific Postal Order required
from this menu.
ie
. <2) CHP Ra a
‘Sioa Steen
2. Tauch the PO £5 icon, BBE or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The £5 Postal Order now appears in the sales stack on the right hand-side of the screen. As a
fee for this sale iter is also incurred, it has been automatically added to the face value of the
Postal Order and is included in the total sales cost.
This is the only item requested by the customer and the sale can now be completed.
3. Touch the Finish icon, 4] or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this example the customer offers to pay with a £10
note:
4. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 26
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 2: Postal Order sales, continued
EPOSS i
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Caan ¢ oe The Amount entry screen is displayed.
pause si Because the amount of cash offered by
“ the customer was not exact, you now
f need to type in the amount tendered.
0°00 .
: se eee In this example £10.00.
ss ee
:
[ ee
os
G0 ro
You can use either the on screen numeric keypad or the keyboard to enter the amount of £10. If
you make a mistake when entering the figures, to delete the last figure typed, either use the black
arrow on the screen, or the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard. The red cross icon on the screen
or the UNDO key will delete the amount entered. There is no need to enter the decimal point.
5. Type £10.00
Note:
it is very important to check the figures on the screen have been entered correctly before
continuing with the transaction.
6, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Another icon is now added to the sales
stack on the right-hand side of the
screen. This icon shows the Cash
tendered by the customer, Notice that
the figure is preceded by a minus sign
and is shown in yellow (indicating a
payment received).
oes e
The Finish icon now shows the amount
of change due to the customer.
ee ED) The menu display has also reverted to
aieeeas)/ the Settlement menu so that you can
register how the change will be given.
Note:
All payments from you to the customer will be in cash, therefore the Cash icon (F1) must
be used.
7. Touch the Cash icon, or Press FI on the keyboard,
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale of a Pestal Order using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 21
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Postal Order sales with stamps
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
This example explains the Horizon procedure for the sale of a Postal Order to the value of
£7.39 where additional stamps need to be added to the face value of the Postal Order. Standard
business procedures apply, ie no more than 3 stamps, up to a maximum value of 49p, may be
attached to a single Postal Order.
Note:
It is still your responsibility to advise the customer of the best fit value of Postal Orders.
From the Serve Customer menu:
L. Touch the Postal Orders icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
‘The Postal Orders sub menu is displayed.
2. Touch the PO £7 icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
The £7 Postal Order icon is now displayed in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen. The original request from the customer was for a Postal Order to the value of £7.39.
You will now need to navigate from the Postal Orders menu to the Postage Stamp screen, to
record the sale of the stamps required to make up the requested value.
3. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
By activating this icon you have navigated backwards one step, from the Postal Orders menu to
the Serve Customer menu. From the Serve Customer menu you can select the correct icon to
sell the stamps.
4. Touch the Postage stmp icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed.
r You can now enter the amount of
% stamps required.
a
You can use either the on screen numeric keypad or the keyboard to enter the amount of stamps
required. If you make a mistake when entering the figures, to delete the Jast figure typed, either
use the black arrow on the on or the BACKSPACE key on the keyboard. The red cross
icon on the screen or the UNDO key will delete the amount entered. There is no need to enter
the decimal point.
OIL WORKBOOK 2
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS L Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Pastal Order sales with stamps, continued pat
5. Type £0.39
Note:
It is very important to check the figures en the screen display have been entered correctly
before continuing with the transaction.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A new icon appears in the sales stack for the extra stamps. The Finish icon at the bottom
reflects the total of the Postal Order, the fee and the additional stamps.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. Again, the customer pays with a £10 note.
8. Teuch the Cash icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Amount entry screen is displayed. The amount of cash offered by the customer can be
entered.
9. Type £10.00
Note:
It is very important to check the figures on the screen display have been entered correctly
before continuing with the transaction.
10. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Finish icon now shows the amount of change due to the customer. The menu display has
reverted to the Settlement menu so that you can register how the change will be given.
Note:
All payments from you to the customer will be in cash, therefore the Cash icon (F1) must
be used.
11. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu
Weill done!
You have completed the sale of a Postal Order with stamps using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref; PATH/43/002
Section 2: Priority stationery sales Date: 29/07/99
. Issue: 2.0
The following transaction is for the sale of a priority stationery fixed price item.
In this example the customer has requested a Swiftpack Smail.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Fouch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Other Products menu is displayed,
2. Teuch the Mail Products icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Mail Products menu is displayed.
The Priority Statnry menu is displayed.
You can see the products which have
been grouped in this menu.
No icons in this group have subordinate
products associated with them.
Activating any icon from this menu
causes the sale to appear in the sales
stack on the right-hand side of the
screen.
4. Touch the Swiftpack smi icon, ot Press F9 on the keyboard.
wrltpsck sint
‘The sale has now been added to the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen, The
customer wishes to pay for the item with the correct cash.
§. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this example:
6. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F! on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system retums to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale of a priority stationery item using the Horizon system.
OICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 24
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Ordinary stationery sales Date: 29/07/99
. Issue: 2.0
The following transaction is for the sale of an ordinary stationery fixed price item.
In this example your customer has requested an Aerogramme.,
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
‘The Other Products menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Mail Products icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Mail Products menu is displayed.
3. Touch the Ordnry Statnry icon, or Press F\2 on the keyboard.
The Ordory Statnry menu is
displayed: all the items are sale items.
You can see there is an icon for the sale
of single Aerogrammes.
asad
I
LR
4. Touch the A/gram sngle icon, or Press 1 on the keyboard.
The sale of the Aerogramme has now appeared in the sales stack.
5. Toueh the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this sale item example:
6. Touch the C
icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard,
This completes the sule and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale of an ordinary stationery item using the Horizen system.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 25
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Parcel services transactions Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The following transaction is for parcel services sales. In this example the customer has
requested a Datapost Inland service.
Note:
Mail transactions for items that weigh up te 6 kg can be carried out as EPOSS Scales
transactions. Refer te Workbook 4.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Other Products menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Mail Products icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Mail Products menu is displayed.
3. Touch the Parcel Services icon, or Press F14 on the keyboard.
The Parcel Services menu is displayed.
You can see there is an icon for Data
Post Inland items.
4. Touch the D/post inland icon, or Press F} on the keyboard.
@4CL WORKBOOK 2
Page 26
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Parcel services transactions, continued Dates 204 Mee
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the basic
A On cost of the Datapost service required,
‘ “ which you will find in the compendium.
eo)
S. Type £14.50
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this example:
8. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale of a parcel services itern using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 27
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1
Section 2: Letter services transactions
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The following transaction is for letter services sales.
In this example the customer wishes to purchase £100 of Pre-Paid Letters.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Yeouck the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
‘The Other Products menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Mail Products icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Mail Products menu is displayed.
3. or Press F1S on the keyboard
The Letter Services menu is displayed.
You can see that there are icons for the
sale of various types of Servic:
All the selections from this menu are
value entry. This means that whichever
service is selected, you will have to key
in an amount.
For this example your customer has
requested the Pre-Paid Letters service.
Sen 88
ons CSTE
Steen
te ec rom
Seon Geman
4. Touch the Prepd Ltrs icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
epee
LPrepd Ltrs.
This causes the Amount entry screen to be displayed (as you have seen in previous examples).
You now need to enter the arnount the customer has requested for this service.
5. Type £100.00
Cheek the amount entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this example:
8. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a letter services sale using the Herizon system.
GACL WORKBOOK 2
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS t Ref: PATH/43/002
. Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Multiple sales example 1 Issue: 2.0
So far in this Workbook all the sales have been for single items. This is a useful exercise in
navigating the Horizon system menus, however it is more usual for customers to request several
items. Some of the items requested in this exercise have not been mentioned specifically in
the individual examples, but they are from the same or similar menu groups.
As with all EPOSS sales, the transaction will begin from the Serve Customer menu.
In this example the customer has requested the following items:
- 1x Ist Class stamp
- 1x 2nd Class stamp
- 1x ist Class stamp book (4 stamps)
1 x Swiftpack C4 Europe
Remember there are five sales that can be made directly from the Serve Customer menu: Ist &
2nd Class stamps, Colour TV Licence Fees, £2 TV and £2 BT Saving Stamps.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the ist class stmp icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
2. Touch the 2nd class stmp icen or, Press F2 on the keyboard.
The first two items requested by your customer have now been recorded and totalled in the
sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. The next item requested is a book of four Ist
class stamps. This item is not available directly from the Serve Customer menu,
3. Touch the Stamp Books icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Stamp Rooks
The Stamp Books menu is now displayed. You can see that there is an icon for the type of
stamp book your customer has requested.
4. Touch the Stp bk Ist x 4 icon, ; t, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Stamp Book requested by your customer has been recorded and added to the total in the
sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. The Horizon system does not return to the
Serve Customer menu because the sale has not yet been completed.
The final item your customer has requested is a Swiftpack Europe. This item is not available
from the Stamp Books menu, so you have to move to the Priority Stationery menu to make the
sale.
© ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Multiple sales example 1, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
5. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
Activating the Prev icon moves you backwards to the previous menu, in this case back to the
Serve Customer menu. The Swiftpack Europe can be obtained from the Priority Stationery
menu.
6. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
7. Touch the Mail Products icon,
iSwttpk C4Euro:
As with the previous items, the Swiftpack Europe is registered in the sales stack, and its
individual cost is added to the overall total for this customer. There are now four items in the
sales stack but only three are visible. Notice ai the top of the sales stack the Open icon is now
displayed. Activating this icon allows you to view all sales items in the stack including those
which were no longer visible on screen,
10. Touch the Open icon, or Press END on the keyboard.
I The screen now displays ivons for all
the sale items.
The Open icon has now changed to a
Close icon. Activating this icon will
return you to the sale menu displayed
prior to activating the Open icon.
© ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Multiple sales example 1, continued Issue: 2.0
or Press END on the keyboard.
The screen now returns to the Priority
Statnry menu visible.
12. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this sale item example:
13. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a multiple sale using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 31
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Multiple sales example 2 Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Some of the items requested in the following exercise have not been mentioned specifically in
the individual examples, but they can be a ed from menu groups on the Other Products
menu.
For the second multiple sale example your customer has requested the following items:
1 x Colour TV Licence
~ 1x £3 BT Phonecard
~ Sx £1 National Lottery Instants
~ 1x £5 MVL Saving Stamp
The first item requested by the customer is a Colour TV Licence.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Colour TV lic icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
To make the sales for the other items you must select the items from various menu groups
under the Other Products menu. ‘The next item the customer requires is a £3 BT Phonecard,
which can be obtained from the Phonecards menu.
2. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
3. Touch the Phonecards icon,
The Phonecards menu is dis)
4, Touch the BT card £3 icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
As this is a fixed price item, it is registered directly into the sales stack.
The next items required are the five National Lottery Instant tickets. These can be sold from
the Leisure menu.
5. Taueh the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Multiple sales example 2, continued pate
The Leisure menu is displayed. You
can see there are icons for National
Lottery and Littlewoods scratcheards.
The next item requested is the 5 x £1 National Lottery instants. You can see an appropriate
icon on screen, but before you activate the icon you must set the Quantity to 9.
Using the keyboard:
3. Type 5
Cheek the Quantity required has been set correctly before continuing.
Note:
If you wish to use the touch screen to change the Quantity, the Quantity icon must be
activated at the top of the screen and the Quantity entered, (see page 15 steps 1 - 3).
8. Touch the Instants £1 icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
SALES STACK
The sale item now appears in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen, the National Lottery Instant sales icon shows Q5 on the icon.
I This indicates that a Quantity of S sales has been registered and the
individual price for the fixed price item has been multiplied S times.
I
i
This value has also been added to the total price of sales showing in the
Finish icon. The Quantity icon has now returned to the default value of (.
®ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 33
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS £ Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Multiple sales example 2, continued
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
The customer has requested one more item to complete the sales session, a £5 MVL Saving
Stamp. The screen display is still showing the Leisure items, and you will now move to the
Saving Stamps menu to record the sale.
9. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
¢ that there is an icon for Saving Stamps.
or Press FS on the keyboard.
‘The Saving Stamps menu is displayed, showing the stamps available. There is an icon for a £5
MYL Saving Stamp.
Il. Touch the MVL stmp icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
All the items requested by the customer are now recorded in the sales stack. Remember that if
a sale stack icon is not visible, you can use the Open icon to view all items and the Close icon
to return to the Sales menu.
12. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. In this sale item example:
13. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard,
‘This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a multiple sale using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 34
i,
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 1
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
Activity Sheet 1 Warkbook 2
answers are practical and require you to use the Horizon sys
Note:
in Training Mode.
1. When is the Quantity icon used?
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read this Workbook again. Some of the
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
Pp
Which icon would you use to delete an item from the sales stack?
3. When would you use the Cash icon on the Serve Customer menu?
your choice:
a) b)
1 x £9 Postal Order 1 x £3 Postal Order
42p in stamps
5x £2 TV stamps
Finish transaction Finish transaction
4, Complete sales on your Horizon system for the following, using a method of payment of
©)
i x Aerogramme single
1x 10 2nd Class stamp book
i x Swiftpack Medium
Finish transaction
@ICL WORKBOOK 2
Page 35
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POST V,
OFFICE
HORIZON
on EPOSS 2
Electronic Point Of Sale Service
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 3
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
EPOSS 2
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
EPOSS 2: Objectives & Intreduction .............0......
Section i
Travel & Licences: Introduction ....................+4.
Rod licences ....
E111 application .....
DVLA mixed payment 2.2.2.2 00. eee
Seetion 2
Girobank & National Savings: Intreduction .............
BT bill payment ...
Girobank cash deposit.
National Savings ordinary account cash ‘deposit .
Encashment of other banks’ cheques . .
Green Gira payments 2.000000...
Green Giro payments with milk tokens ©... 0.0.2...
Multiple sales 2.000000 eee ene
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 3 000000 ec cee
neces 13
©IcL
WORKBOOK 3
Page I
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 3
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 2
HORIZON SY:
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this Workbook you will be able to:
1. Complete transactions from the Travel, Licences and Personal Finance groups.
2. Complete an MVL transaction registering a mixed payment.
3. 2 the Horizon system to register Girobank and National Savings transactions.
4 e the Horizon system to register Green Giro transactions.
Introduction:
This Workbook is the second in a series of three describing the actions and procedures for the
sale of, and payment for, post office products and postage items using the EPOSS (Electronic
Point Of Sale Service) function of the Horizon system.
This Workbook is divided into two sections. Section 1 covers general navigation and
transactions from the Travel and Licences menu groups. Section 2 covers transactions from the
Girobank and National Savings menus.
If you need to reverse a transaction for a customer or if you completed it incorrectly at the
counter, refer to the procedures for reversing transactions described in Workbook 7.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
eich WORKBOOK 3
Page 3
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 4
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
SECTION 1 - TRAVEL & LICENCES
INTRODUCTION
introduction:
groups.
business.
Note:
updated when this facility becomes available.
This section covers general navigation and transactions from the Travel and Licences menu
There are examples for the MVL & Fishing Licence transactions included in this section,
however these are only applicable to post offices which conduct MVL & Fishing Licence
Fishing Licences are currently not available in Scotland. You will be able to sell Fishing
Licences over the counter in Scotland in the near future. The Horizon system will be
ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page §
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Sich
WORKBOOK 3
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Rod licences Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
In the following example the customer has requested an 8 day salmon rod licence.
From the Desktop menu, select Transactions, then select Serve Customer.
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Licences menu is now displayed.
The customer has requested an 8 day
salmon rod licence which appears on
the Fishing menu.
Note:
Fishing Licences are NOT available in Northern Ireland and as such the Fishing Licence
icon will not be available on the Licences menu.
3. Touch the Fishing icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Fishing menu is displayed,
featuring the various rod licences
available.
@ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page?
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 1: Red licences, continued
EPOSS 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
4. Touch the salmon 8 day icon,
Well done!
5. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Setdement menu is displayed and ihe method of payment offered by the customer can now
be activated using the relevant icon. For this sale item example:
6. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
‘This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
You have completed the sale of a rod licence using the Horizon system.
or Press F7 on the keyboard.
OIL
WORKBOOK 3
Page 8
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
7 . + net Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: E111 application Issue: 2.0
This exercise covers a non value transaction from the Travel menu. In this example the
customer has retumed to the post office with a completed E111 application to be checked.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Travel icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Travel menu is displayed. Some of
the icons in this group have other
menus subordinate to them.
In this example the customer has
completed an E111 application form.
You can see that there is an icon for
registering E111 applications on screen.
Note:
Remember to carry out the existing POCL checks on the E111 application form.
3. Touch the E111 icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
The ‘sale’ of the E111 is registered in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. Note
that there is ne charge to the customer for processing the E11! application.
4, Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Since there was no charge to the customer, activating the Finish icon completes the transaction
and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have processed an Elli application and registered the transaction using the Herizon
system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 9
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: DVLA mixed payment
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
This exercise covers a single transaction, utilising the mixed payment feature of the settlement
menu,
In this example the customer has requested an MVL V10 licence for 12 months to the value of
£155 and wishes to redeem £50 in MVL stamps and pay the remainder by cheque. All the
accompanying paperwork is in order.
Note:
It should be noted that post offices that do not conduct MVL transactions will not have
access to the MVL icons on the Licences menu.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Licences icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Licences menu is displayed. There is an icon for MVL vi0.
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Amount sereen is displayed. The
system prompts you to type in the price
of the V10 required by the customer.
= In this example the cost of a VIO
licence for a 12 month period is
£155.00.
Note:
Refer to the V149 for the cost of the licence required by the customer.
4. Type £155.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The transaction is displayed in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. This is the
only request from the customer.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard
The Settlement menu is displayed.
‘The customer wishes to redeem £50 of MVL Stamps and pay the rest by cheque.
ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
7 . r : , " Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: DVLA mixed payment, continued Issue: 2.0
The Settlement menu has an option for redeeming MVL stamps. At this point you need to
count the amount of stamps being redeemed and set the Quantity accordingly.
In this example the customer is redeeming 10 stamps (total value £50.00).
7. Type 30.
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the MVL stmp rdm icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
(VE stmp rd
The amount of the redeerned MVL stamps appears as an icon in the sales stack: this amount
(£50.00) has been deducted from the original amount of £155.00. There is an outstanding
balance of £105 to be collected from the customer. The customer pays the balance by cheque.
9. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
This cornpletes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Note:
Cheques can only be accepted for those products stipulated in current POCL procedures.
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cheques at the counter still
apply.
Well done!
You have completed a DVLA transaction, registering a mixed form of payment from the
customer using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page il
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 3
Page 12
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
GIROBANK & NATIONAL SAVINGS
INTRODUCTION
Intreduction:
with or without milk tokens.
This section covers general navigation and transactions from the Girobank and National
Savings menu groups. It also explains the process for the encashment of Green Giro benefit
©ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 13
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/062
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
ich
WORKBOOK 3
Page 14
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
~artton 2: BP bf Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: BT bill payment Issue: 2.0
This exercise covers the payment of a BT bill from the Serve Customer menu (note that BT
bills can also be paid from the Utilities menu). In this example the customer wishes fo pay
their £75.43 BT bill by cheque.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the BT bill pymt icon, or Press FLO on the keyboard.
The A/C NO sereen is displayed. At
this point you must enter the customer’s
RIC NO BT b BT Account Number.
im me “4 I In this example the account number is:
123456789
nee
2. Type 123456789
Check the account number entered is correct before continuing.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter the amount the
customer wishes to pay against the BT
bill.
In this example the customer wishes to
pay £75.43.
4. Type £75.43
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 15
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: BT bill payment, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The total shown in the sales stack now reflects the BT bill payment of £75.43.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. You now have to record the payment offered by the
customer,
7. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Note:
Cheques can only be accepted for these preducts stipulated in current POCL procedures.
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cheques at the counter still
apply.
Well done!
You have completed a BT bill payment using the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 16
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Girobank cash deposit Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
.
In this example the customer wishes to deposit £100.00 in their Girobank account.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Girobank menu is displayed
featuring the various Girobank
transactions that can be carried out.
There is an icon for Girobank cash
deposits.
or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The A/C NO screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter the customer's
5 d Girobank Account Number.
In this example the account number is:
987654321.
4, Type 987654321
Check the account number is correct before continuing.
NTER on the keyboard,
5. Touch ihe green tick icon, or Press
©L WORKBOOK 3
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Girobank cash deposit, continued ete
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the amount
the customer wishes to deposit in their
Girobank account.
in this example the customer wishes to
pay in £100.00,
6. Type £100.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The total shown in the sales stack now reflects the Girobank deposit of £100.00,
8. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. You now have to record a payment from the customer.
9. Teuck the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a Girobank cash deposit using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: National Savings erdinary account cash deposit Dat 1 ae
In this example the customer wishes to deposit £100.00 in their National Savings ordinary
account.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
or Press F2 on the keyboard.
a Ga en Ges The National Savings menu is displayed
hcl TL een. ¢ nos : areas
bea e eed) eats) I Gaeaha featuring the various National Savings
transactions that can be carried out.
There is an icon for ordinary account
deposits.
or Press F1 on the keyboard.
oa ae) The Amount screen is displayed. The
rena feed ‘a system prompts you to enter the amount
the customer wishes to deposit in their
account
ae
ras
=
4. Type £100.00
Check the amount is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 19
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATHVS3/002
Section 2: National Savings ordinary account cash deposit, continued Pate: 200
The total shown in the sales stack now reflects the National Savings deposit of £100.00.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. You now have to record a payment from the customer.
7, Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
‘This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a National Savings ordinary account cash deposit using the Horizon
system.
®ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 20
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Encashment of other banks cheques cae LEA
This exercise covers the encashment of other banks’ cheques from the Personal Finance menu
of the Horizon system. In this example the customer has requested to encash a cheque already
made out to the value of £45.
Note:
Cheques can only be accepted for these products stipulated in current POCL procedures.
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cheques at the counter still
apply.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Pers Finance icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
ers Finance
‘The Pers Finance menu is displayed.
You can see there is an icon OB chq to
DPC (Other Banks’ cheques to Data
Processing Centre).
or Press FL on the keyboard.
The Amount sereen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the arnount
< of the cheque.
00
©ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 21
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Encashment of other banks cheques, continued oe ee
Note:
The system will automatically deduct the fixed charge for the cheque encashment service.
Customers requiring a specific sum ef cash should be advised to add the handling fee
when making out a cheque.
4, Type £45.00
Check the arnount entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The transaction is now displayed in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. Notice
the icon in the sales stack is for £40.00, the £5 handling fee has been automatically deducted.
Remember that the transaction can still be cancelled at the customer's request, by using the Bin
icon.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. The method of payment offered to the customer can now be
activated using the Cash icon.
7. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
This completes the sale and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a transaction to encash other bank s cheques, using the Herizon
system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 22
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
sotto Fe Ce se Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Green Giro payments Issue: 2.0
Another type of transaction that can be carried out for a customer is Green Giro payments.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the payment of Green Giros at the counter still
apply.
The value of the payment made must be recorded on the Horizon system.
In this example a customer has presented a Green Giro for payment.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Green giro icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the amount
to be paid on the Green giro.
0:00 : For this example the value of the Green
: giro is £48.10.
2. Type £48.10
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
4. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Settlement menu is displayed. As this is a payment to the customer, the transaction must
be completed to Cash.
3. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
This completes the transaction and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have paid a customer 9 Green Giro benefit using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Green Gire payments with milk tokens Panes
Occasionally a Green Giro with milk tokens will be presented for payment.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the payment of Green Giros at the counter still
apply.
In this example the customer has presented a Green Giro for payment and two milk tokens are
to be issued.
When milk tokens are associated with a green giro payment, the transaction must be carried out
from the P and A (Pensions and Allowances) menu.
From the Serve Customer menu:
lt. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
KP and A
‘The P and A menu is displayed. You
can see various icons for the OBCS.
(Order Book Control Service)
functions on the Horizon system. These
are explained in more detail in
Workbook 5.
There are two icons, Green giro and
Green giro milk at the bottom of the
screen,
‘Same
os nO
mereearen
‘Sune Semana
or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the amount
to be paid on the Green giro.
0:00: eyes In this example the value of the Green
= . giro is £34.60.
Que KOOs Beles I ME cece ;
- : peaetaretes
ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 24
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Green Giro payments with milk tokens, continued Issue: 2.0
4. Type £34.60
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The value of the Green Giro now appears as an icon in the sales stack on the right-hand side of
the screen. The Horizon system has returned to the P and A menu. In addition to the value of
the Green Giro, two milk tokens also need to be issued to the customer.
6. Type 2
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the Green giro milk icon, or Press F14 on the keyboard.
8. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. As this is a payment to the customer, the transaction must
be completed to Cash. Do not forget to issue the milk tokens to the customer.
9. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
This completes the transaction and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have paid a customer s Green Gire benefit and issued milk tokens using the Horizon
system.
WORKBOOK 3
Page 25
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
es . ; Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Multiple sales Issue: 2.0
So far in this Workbook all the sales have been for single items. This is a useful exercise in
navigating the Horizon system menus, however it is more usual for a customer to request sever-
al items. Some of the items requested in this exercise have not been mentioned specifically in
the individual examples, but they are from the same or similar menu groups.
In the first multiple sale example the customer has requested the following items:
~ AUK adult passport
~ £150 of Premium Bonds
~ A withdrawal of £75 from their Girobank account.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding Passport & Premium Bond applications at the
counter still apply.
From the Serve Customer menu:
{. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
ne
. Touch the Travel icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
3. Touch the Ukpa adult A/B icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
As this item is fixed price the sale appears in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen.
‘The next item requested by the customer is £150 of Premium Bonds: they have correctly
completed a Premium Bond application form.
4. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard,
This action returns you one step backwards in the navigation process, in this case to the Other
Products menu.
5. Touch the Girobank icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
Premium
6. Touch the PSB purchase icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 26
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2; Multiple sales, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
aaa The A/C NO screen is displayed. The
. system prompts you to enter the account
is number for the purchase of Premium
Bonds.
UN
In this example the account number is
6186742.
L
7. Type 6186742
Cheek the account number is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Amount sereen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the amount
Bc of Premium Bonds the customer wishes
ee to purchase.
je In this example the customer wishes to
3 3 . purchase £150.00.
9. Type £150.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
10. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keybourd.
The Premium Bonds are added to the stack. The customer now wishes to withdraw £75.00
from their Girobank account to help pay for the purchases.
The Girobank withdrawal icon is also available on the Girobank menu.
11. Touch the Giro widrwi icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 27
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Reh: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Multiple sales, continued
Issue: 2.6
The AC NO screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter the customer’s
Girobank Account Number.
In this example the account number is
987654321.
12. Type 987654321
Cheek the account number is correct before continuing.
13. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the amount
the customer wishes to withdraw from
their Girobank account.
9:00
In this example the customer wishes to
Bow e9 withdraw £75.00.
és} *
2 -
Oe s00
14. Type £75.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
18. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
This completes the customer's requirements.
16. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. The customer settles the outstanding amount in cash.
17. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
This completes the transaction and the Horizon system retums to the Serve Customer menu.
Weil done!
You have completed a multiple sale using the Herizon system.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 3
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 2 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 3
If there are any questions you are unable to answer read this Workbook again. Some of the
answers are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. What details are required to complete an MVL transaction on the Horizon system?
nN
What details are required before you can complete a Girobank cash deposit?
3. Complete a Green Giro payment for £73.20 with 2 milk tokens.
4. Complete the following sales on your Horizon system, settling with Cash or Cheque:
a) b)
1 x UK child’s passport 1 x full season coarse rod licence (if applicable)
1x Ell) Health Cert. 1x MVL vil @ £155 (if applicable)
Green Giro payment of £50.00
Finish transaction redeeming £45 of MVL
Finish transaction saving stamps
© ich WORKBOOK 3
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
'OL00090452
POST V,
OFFICE
HORIZON
- EPOSS 3
Scales
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 3 - SCALES
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
EPOSS 3 - Scales: Objectives & Introduction .....0..00.00.0-.0.-.0.6.65..3
Section 1
Inland Scales transaction ..........-.5.-
European Scales transaction .. :
International Scales transaction ©. 6.6 eee eee
Pick by Country Scales transaction
Multiple Scales transaction
Activity Sheet I Workbaok 4 0.00.60 oc cc cece eee
©ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page t
POL00090452
POL00090452
SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@1CL WORKBOOK 4
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 3 - SCALES
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this Workbook, you will be able to:
1. Complete EPOSS Scales transactions using the various Horizon system customer facilities.
Introduction:
This Workbook is the third in a series of three describing the actions and procedures for the sale
of, and payment for, post office products and postage items using the EPOSS (Electronic Point
Of Sale Service) function of the Horizon system:
This Workbook covers transactions using the Scales menu group. The Horizon system will
assume that electronic scales (Avery Berkel D104) are attached to the system. If this is the case
then the weight of postage items will be registered automatically by the Horizon system. If
electronic scales are not attached to your system, you can still use all the functions and
services associated with the Scales menu, however you will have to enter the weight of the mail
item using the keyboard or on screen keypad. In addition to basic Scales transactions, the
Horizon system provides additional functions and services connected with mail items: these are
used and explained in the examples.
The Scales function of the Horizon system will allow you to complete mail item transactions up
to 6 kg in weight. Mail items above 6 kg should be treated as postage items, and the price of
the service(s) required should be obtained from the appropriate mail compendium.
If you need to reverse a transaction for a customer or if you completed it incorrectly at the
counter, refer to the procedures for reversing transactions described in
Workbook 7.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again
©ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 3
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system, If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, consult the Horizon
System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
@1ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/602
Section 1: Inland Scales transaction Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
In all the Scales transactions shown in this Workbook, the electronic scales are not connected to
the Horizon system. The Horizon system will display an appropriate message and the weight
of the mail item will then need to be entered manually using the on screen keypad or the
keyboard.
In this example the customer has requested the following postal service:
- An Inland mail item, weight 400 grammes, to be sent Ist class.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Scales menu is displayed. There
are a number of icons for postal
services.
In this example the customer has
requested an Inland ist Class postal
service
3. Touch the Inland icon,
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page S$
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3
Section 1: Intand Scales transaction, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 2917/99
Issue: 2.0
In this example the scales are not attached to the
need to be activated.
4. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
I
I
I In this example the weight of the mail
I
I
§. Type 400
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
em, therefore the Yes green tick icon will
‘The Scales Locked information screen
is displayed. This screen informs you
that the scales are not available but you
can continue the transaction by touching
the Yes green tick icon and entering the
weight of the mail item manually. The
No red cross icon will abandon the
current Scales transaction.
If scales are connected, place the mail
item on the scales: the system will
automatically move to step 7.
The Weight screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the weight
of the mail item in grammes.
item is 400g.
®ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 6
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section {: Inland Seales transaction, continued Pate om Men
The Select a service (400 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered
the weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard services available and the
postage required. The system always defaults to the top choice on the list, indicated by the line
highlighted in yellow. This may be the customer’s preferred choice: if this is not the case, an
alternative must be selected.
Select a service menu
WEIGHT OF
MAIL
or GREEN
SERVI
ARROW
AVAILABLE
“ ICONS
CONFIRM.
SELECTION
PAGE NUMBER
AND
TOTAL PAGES
Only 6 different services may be displayed on screen at one time. At the bottom of the menu it
says Page I of 1, so this is the only page of services available. On the right-hand side of the
screen there are four green arrow icons: as there is only one page of servic flable, all the
page selection green arrow icons have no entry symbols superimposed. Therefore the
customer's required service must be selected from this page of services. To select the service
required by the customer, touch the line on screen that corresponds to the service required.
Alternatively, the selection can be made using the keyboard scroll arrow keys (shown below) to
move up or down through the selections.
vi >
The customer has already indicated that they require the mail item to be sent First Class.
7. Select the Inland First service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the Down
scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 7
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATIN/A3/002
Section 1: Inland Seales transaction, continued Pate: 230
I The inland First service is highlighted
(in yellow, indicating that the postage
I required is £1.14.
F me
I I
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Inland First screen is displayed.
The Basic Service Charge for the mail
item weighing 400 grammes (0.400 kg)
I is shown in the Mail Item summary, in
I this example £1.14.
A number of other icons appear on this screen. Here is a brief description of the other icons
that can be used at this stage:
Add Sves (F4)
‘This icon can be activated to offer the customer additional services above
the Basic Service Charge for the mail item(s), for example Recorded Dly.
Change Oty (8)
This icon can be activated when the customer requests the same service for
more than one mail item of the same weight. It should be noted that when
the Quantity function is activated through the Change Qty icon, any
additional service costs will be multiplied by the quantity set.
©1CL WORKBOOK 4
Page 8
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Inland Scales transaction, continued saad
Pre-Paid (F12)
This icon is activated when an amount of postage has already been affixed
to the item or items to be posted. The Horizon system will deduct any
pre-paid amount from the final total.
Abandon (F14)
When activated, this icon will abandon the transaction and it is not recorded
on the system.
Best Fit (F15)
When activated, this icon will display the best fit of stamps for the item to
be posted.
Complete (F16)
When activated, this icon will complete the transaction and add it to the
sales stack.
The customer has indicated that they do not want any additional services but, however they
have already affixed a £1 stamp to the mail item.
or Press F12 on the Keyboard.
‘The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the
i > Amount already pre-paid on the mail
ee : item.
20% 00
10. Type £1.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
ll. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 9
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Inland Seales transaction, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
‘The system returns to the Inland First
Mail Item screen. The Basic Service
Charge has not changed, but the
Amount Pre-Paid has been entered and
the Total amended to reflect the postage
In this example a further i4p of stamps
should be affixed to the mail item.
The transaction can now be completed on the Horizon system. You have two options available:
~ Best Fit
~ Complete
in this example the Complete icon will be activated.
12. Touch the Complete green tick icon,
——
a] a eh
or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The system returns to Scales menu.
‘The Finish icon indicates the postage
13. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the appropriate method of payment offered by the
customer can be selected. In this example the customer has tendered the correct amount in
cash.
14. Teuch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed an Inland Scales transaction using the Horizon system.
that needs to be affixed to the mail itern.
that needs to be affixed to the mail item.
®ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 10
POL00090452
PoLo0090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1; European Scales transaction Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Occasionally, a customer may request several mail items to be posted to the same destination
If these mail items are the same weight and the Basic Service Charge and any additional
services required are identical for each item, the Change Qty function of the Scales service can
be used. Alternatively, the Quantity can be set prior to activating the appropriate icon from the
Scales menu.
In this example the customer has requested the following postal service:
- S identical mail items to Europe each weighing 200 grammes.
Note:
Each mail item MUST be weighed individually.
From the Serve Customer menu:
I. Toueh the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Scales icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
The Scales menu is displayed. There is an icon for postal services to Europe.
3. Touch the Europe icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
‘The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. This screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
4. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the Keyboard,
The Weight screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item
in grammes.
In this example the weight of the mail item is 200g.
3. Type 200
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page tt
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: European Scales transaction, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Select a service (200 grammes):
screen is displayed. The Horizon
system has registered the weight of the
mail item and is now displaying the
standard services available to Europe.
As with the Inland Scales transaction,
there are only 6 services available to
Europe. You can therefore select the
service the customer requires.
In this example the customer requires
the Euro Air Letter service.
Swe Gace
7. Select the Euro Air Letter service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the Down
scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
Check the service selected is correct before continuing.
Note:
You must check that the service selected is suitable for the mail item.
8. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Euro Air Letter screen is displayed.
The Basic Service Charge is shown.
The customer has indicated that they do
not require any additional services but
they have 5 identical items to be mailed
to the same location.
All the mail items have been weighed
separately and are the same weight and
require the same Basic Service.
9. Touch the Change Qty icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
eIcL WORKBOOK 4
Page 12
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: European Scales transaction, continued oat ee oo
The Quantity screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the
Quantity of mail items required by the
customer,
10. Type 5
Check the Quantity entered is correct before continuing.
11. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A Note screen is displayed, indicating
that changing to a multiple quantity will
multiply each pre-paid amount or
additional service by the indicated
quaritity.
in this example at the request of the customer you have changed the quantity to 5. This means
that the Basic Service Charge, in this example £1.44, will now be multiplied 5 times. In
addition to the Basic Service Charge, if any additional service charges were to be, requested
they would also be multiplied by 5.
12. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
GAICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 13
HORIZON SYSTEM
EPOSS 3
Section L: European Seales transaction, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The system returns to the Euro Air
Letter Mail Iter screen.
bracketed at the end, to indicate the
Service Charge applies to all 5 items.
The customer has not requested any
:
I The Basic Service Charge has x 5
additional services.
{
or Press F15 on the keyboard.
A Reminder screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to affix the stamps
displayed on the following screen to
each item.
14. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Best Fit screen is displayed. The
screen gives a suggested combination of
stamps which should be affixed to the
mail items.
At this point you should check that you
have the stamps available. If not, a
different combination can be used, but
the Override icon must be activated.
In this example the suggested
combination of stamps is acceptable.
OIL
WORKBOOK 4
Page 14
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: European Scales transaction, continued ee
Note:
If the Best Fit screen recommends the use of first or second class stamps and these are not
used, then a discrepancy will be found in the stock and stamps at the end of the
accounting week.
15. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The screen returns to the Scales menu. The mail item is displayed in the sales stack. This is
the only service requested by the customer.
16. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the appropriate method of payment offered by the
customer can be selected. In this example the customer has tendered the correct amount in
cash.
17. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed a European Scales transaction using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page {8
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: International Scales transaction Pate
Occasionally, a customer may request an additional service for a mail item, or you may suggest
an appropriate additional service for the mail item. It is possible to list these additional
services, together with their cost, for the Scales transaction being carried out. The service
required by the customer can be selected and the cost of the service will then be added to the
Basic Service Charge.
In this example the customer has requested the following postal service:
» Air Letter weighing {20 grammes, to the USA (International Zone 1) to be sent Swiltair.
From the Serve Customer menu:
{. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Scales icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
3. Touch the Intnl Zone I icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. This screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
4. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Weight screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item
in grammes.
In this example the weight of the mail item is 120g.
5. Type 120
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Select a service (120 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered
the weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard services available to all
International Zone I countries. The customer has indicated that the mail item should be sent
Air Letter.
7, Select the Zone I Air Letter service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the
Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 16
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 1: International Seales transaction, continued
EPOSS 3
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
When the service is selected, it will be
highlighted in yellow.
Note:
&. Touch the Select green tick icon,
9. Touch the Add. Svcs icon,
Check the service selected is correct before continuing.
You must check that the service selected is suitable for the mail item.
The Zone I Air Letter screen is displayed. The Basic Service Charge is shown.
The customer has indicated that they require the Swiftair additional service.
or Press P4 on the keyboard.
or Press F\ on the keyboard.
I The Select an Additional Service:
I screen is displayed.
_ The customer has requested a Swiftair
additional service.
Gch
WORKBOOK 4
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1; International Scales transaction, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
In the previous examples where the Select a Service screen was displayed, there were only ever
6 options available for selection. In this example, af the bottom of the screen the system
indicates that page I of 2 is displayed. On the right-hand side of the screen, two of the page
selection green arrow icons no longer have a no entry symbol superimposed. The Down green
arrow icon (PAGE DOWN) allows you to view the next page. The Bottom green arrow icon
{FL1) allows you to go to the bottom page in the list. Once either of the icons is activated, the
no entry symbol is removed from the Top and Up green arrow icons.
10, Touch the Down green arrow icon, or Press PAGE DOWN on the keyboard.
The second page (of two) is now displayed. You can see there are only two other services
available for this mail item. The Up green arrow icon (PAGE UP) allows you to view the
previous page in the list. The Top green arrow icon (12) allows you to go to the top page in
the list.
Ll. Teuch the Up green arrow icon, SE DP on the keyboard.
The screen returns to page I of the services available. The top service on the menu is
highlighted in yellow. The customer has already indicated that they require the Swiftair
service.
12. Select the Swiftair service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the Down scroll
arrow key on the keyboard.
Check the service selected is correct before continuing.
Note:
It is still your responsibility to ensure that the additional service requested is available to
the destination country. The Horizon system will offer all the additional services
available to the Zone rather than to individual countries.
13. Touch the Select green tick icon, 4 or Press Fi on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 18
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: International Scales transaction, continued pa
The Horizon system returns to the Zone
1 Air Letter Mail Item screen.
The Add. Svcs icon now has a green
border around the outside to indicate
that a service has been added, and the
Total reflects this,
cues
The customer has no other
requirements,
14. Touch the Best Fit icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard,
The Best Fit screen is displayed. The
< screen gives a suggested combination of
Be stamps which should be affixed to the
4 mail item.
At this point you should check that you
have the stamps available. If not, a
different combination can be used, but
mi : : the Override icon must be activated.
Sa oe Saas : In this example the suggested
combination of stamps is acceptable.
Note:
If the Best Fit screen recommends the use of first or second class stamps and these are net
used, then a discrepancy will be found in the stock and stamps at the end of the
accounting week.
1S. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The screen returns to the Scales menu, the mail item is displayed in the sales stack. This is the
only service requested by the customer.
16. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Setilement menu is displayed and the appropriate method of payment offered by the
customer can be selected. In this example the customer has tendered the correct amount in
cash.
17. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed an International Zone 1 Scales transaction using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 19
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Pick by Country Seales transaction Pate: ae on i
‘The Horizon system has a Pick by Country function which will allow you to select the
destination for the customer, if you are unsure which International Zone the country is in.
In the next example the customer has requested the following postal service:
- Air Printed Papers weighing 800 grammes, to Uruguay, no additional services are required.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Scales icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
The Scales menu is displayed, there is an icon Pick by Country.
3, Touch the Pick by Country icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard,
The Select a Country; screen is
displayed. The countries are listed in
alphabetical order and their designation
is shown to the right eg Afghanistan is
designated Intnl Zone 1.
In this example the customer has
requested to send a mail item to
Uruguay.
I
SumGamer
To make the selection, you can use the page selection green arrow icons on the right-hand side
of the screen to move up and down the list, to reveal the destination country required.
Alternatively, the PAGE UP, PAGE DOWN, F11 and F12 keys on the keyboard can be used to
make the selection.
There are 40 pages of countries to select from so using the page selection function would be
time-consuming. The Horizon system has the facility whereby you can enter the first letter or
two of the destination country required and the picklist will then display all countries starting
with these letters.
4. Type the letters UR
CCL WORKBOOK 4
Page 20
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Pick by Country Scales transaction, continued Dae: 2007 °
The Select a Country: UR screen shows
all countries starting with the letters
UR, in alphabetical order.
In this example Uruguay is highlighted
in yellow. If this was not the country
you required, you could continue adding
letters to the country name to find the
required destination.
5. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. The screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
6. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Weight screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item
in grammes.
In this example, the weight of the mail item is 800g.
7. Type 800
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Select a service (800 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered
the weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard services available to all
International Zone I countries. The customer has indicated that the mail item contains printed
papers.
9. Select the Zone I Air PP Books service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the
Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
Cheek the service selected is correct before continuing.
Note:
You must check that the service selected is suitable for the mail item.
10. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 21
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/M3/002
Section 1: Pick by Country Scales transaction, continued ea
The Zone! Air PP Books Mail Item
screen is displayed. The Basic Service
Charge is shown.
The customer has indicated that they do
not require any additional services.
Bade
oes
or Press F15 on the keyboard.
The Best Fit screen is displayed.
This screen gives a suggested
combination of stamps which should be
affixed to the mail item.
At this point you should check that you
have the stamps available. If not, a
different combination can be used, but
I ie the Override icon must be activated.
Note:
In this example, the system has included a second class stamp in its suggested combination
of stamps. If this transaction is completed and the suggested combination of stamps not
used, then a discrepancy will be found at the end of the accounting week.
In this example the the suggested combination of stamps is acceptable.
12. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
GICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Pick by Country Scales transaction, continued Dates 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
1 Se oS Ge
The screen returns to the Scales menu.
I The mail item is displayed in the sales
I stack. You can see that there are two
postage icons, one for the second class
stamp and the other for the remaining
postage required for the mail item.
This is the only service requested by the
customer.
13, Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the appropriate method of payment offered by the
customer can be selected. In this example the customer has tendered the correct amount in
cash,
14, Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed an International Scales transaction the Horizon system.
Ich WORKBOOK 4
Page 23
POL00090452
PoLoo090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Multiple Scales transaction Date; 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
In the following example the customer has requested a number of Scales transactions:
- 3x 120 gramme mail items, the basic service required is Special Delivery (£250). No
additional services are required.
~ 1x 6§ grarnme mail item to Germany, the basic service required is Euro Air Letter.
The customer requires the additional service of registered international for a value of £500.
- 1x 680 gramme mail item to the Cayman Islands, the basic service required is Air PP
Books. The customer has already affixed a £1.50 stamp to the item.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Scales icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
The Scales menu is displayed. The customer’s first request is for 3 Inland Ist mail items.
3. Touch the Inland icon, ot Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. This screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
4. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Weight screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item
in grammes.
In this example the weight of the mail item is 120g.
5. Type 120
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Select a service (120 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered
the weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard Inland services available. The
customer has requested the Special Delivery £250 service.
7. Select the Special Delivery £250 service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the
Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
Cheek the service selected is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Special Delivery £250 Mail Item screen is displayed. The Basic Service Charge is shown.
The customer has indicated that they do not require any additional services but they have two
other identical items which have been weighed separately and are the same weight and require
the same Basic Service.
©ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 24
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43002
Section 1: Multiple Scales transaction, continued Pate: 0
9. Touch the Change Qty icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
10. Type 3
Check the Quantity entered is correct before continuing.
Ll. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A Note screen is displayed, indicating that changing to a multiple quantity will multiply each
pre-paid amount or additional service by the indicated quantity.
in this example you have changed the quantity to 3.
12. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
The display returns to the Special Delivery £250 Mail Item screen. The Basic Service Charge
now has x 3 bracketed at the end, indicating that the service charge has been
multiplied by 3. The Total also indicates the increase in quantity.
13. Touch the Best Fit icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
A Reminder information screen is
displayed.
The system prompts you te affix the
stamps displayed on the following
screen to each item.
14. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
_ The Best Fit screen is displayed. The
= I sereen gives a suggested combination of
& stamps which should be affixed to the
mail items.
351 . At this point you should check that you
- have the stamps available. If not, a
. different combination can be used, but
p : : the Override icon must be activated.
: In this example the suggested
combination of stamps is acceptable.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 25
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Multiple Scales transaction, continued Dates 2007
Note:
If the Best Fit screen recommends the use of first or second class stamps and these are not
used, then a discrepancy will be found in the stock and stamps at the end of the
accounting week.
15. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
‘The system returns to the Scales menu. This completes the first Scales service requested by the
customer. You can now proceed with the customer's second request, the 65 gramme mail item
to Germany: the basic service required is Air Letter. The customer requires the additional
service of registered international for a value of £500.
16. Touch the Europe icon, or Press F5 on the keyboard.
The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. This screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
17. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Weight screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item
in grammes.
In this example the weight of the mail item is 65g.
18. Type 65
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
19, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Select a service (65 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered the
weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard services available to Europe. The
customer has requested the Euro Air Letter service.
20. Select the Euro Air Letter service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the
Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
Cheek the service selected is correct before continuing.
Note:
You must check that the service selected is suitable for the mail item.
21. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Euro Air Letter Mail Item screen is displayed. The basic service charge is indicated, the
customer has requested an additional service for this mail item.
22. Touch the Add. Svcs icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
23. Select the Registered Intl £500 service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing the
Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 26
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Multiple Seales transaction, continued Dates ee
Note:
It is still your responsibility te ensure that the additional service requested is available te
the destination country. The Horizon system will offer all the additional services
available te the Zone rather than to individual countries.
Check the service selected is correct before continuing.
24. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Euro Air Letter screen. The additional service has been added to the
Basic Service Charge. The customer has not requested any other services for this mail item.
25. Touch the Best Fit icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
The Best Fit screen is displayed. The
screen gives a suggested combination of
stamps which should be affixed to the
mail items.
eA
ote
At this point you should check that you
have the stamps available. If not, a
different combination can be used, but
the Override icon must be activated,
Rats
oe
ms
te
eee
sae
-
a6,
“on
oe
ae
Seite
oon
oe
eee
ee
Pelaatecak
&
a
-
a
oe
on
-
In this example the suggested
combination of stamps is acceptable.
+ ee
pe cet
26. Touck the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Scales menu. This completes the second Scales service requested by
the customer. You can now proceed with the customer's final request, the 680 gramme mail
item to Cayman Islands, the basic service required is Air PP Books, The customer requires no
additional services but has affixed a £1.50 stamp to the mail item.
If you knew to which International Zone the Cayman Islands belonged you could select the
appropriate icon (Intnl Zone 1). However, in this example you are unsure so you need to use
the Pick by Country facility.
27. Touch the Pick by Country icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
ick by Country
The Select a Country picklist screen is displayed, The first selection (Afghanistan) is
highlighted in yellow. The quickest way to find the country required is to enter the first two or
three letters of the destination country.
In this example the required country is the Cayman Islands.
28. Type CAY
The picklist has moved to page 7 with
destination
man Is highlighted in yellow. To select the
© ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Multiple Scales transaction, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
29. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Scales Locked information screen is displayed. This screen informs you that the scales are
not available but you can continue the transaction by touching the Yes green tick icon and
entering the weight of the mail item manually.
30. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Weight screen is displayed. The screen prompts you to enter the weight of the mail item in
grammes.
In this example the weight of the mail item is 680g.
31. Type 680
Check the weight entered is correct before continuing.
32. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Select a service (680 grammes): screen is displayed. The Horizon system has registered
the weight of the mail item and is now displaying the standard services available to
International Zone I countries. The customer has requested the Air PP Books service.
33. Select the Zone I Air PP Books service by Touching the line on screen, or by Pressing
the Down scroll arrow key on the keyboard.
Check the service selected is correct before continuing.
Note:
You must check that the service selected is suitable for the mail item.
34. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Zone 1 Air PP Books Mail Item screen is displayed. The Basic Service Charge is
indicated, the customer has already affixed a £1.50 stamp to the mail item.
35. Touch the Pre-Paid icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the amount pre-paid on the
mail item.
36. Type £1.50
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
37. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Zone I Air PP Books Mail Item screen. The Amount Pre-Paid has
been deducted from the Basic Service Charge.
38. Touch the Best Fit icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 28
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/434002
Section 1: Multiple Scales transaction, continued nen
The Best Fit screen is displayed. The
screen gives a suggested combination of
stamps which should be affixed to the
mail items,
At this point you should check that you
have the stamps available. If not, a
different combination can be used, but
the Override icon must be activated.
In this example the suggested
combination of stamps is acceptable.
I
39. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
40. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed and the appropriate method of payment offered by the
customer can be selected. In this example the customer has tendered the correct amount in
cash.
41. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
nd
Well done!
You have completed a multiple Scales transaction using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Refi PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM EPOSS 3 Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 2947/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 4
If there are any questions you are unable to answer read this Workbook again. Some of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. Which facility would you use to check the International Zone designation of a country
if you were unsure of it?
v
Which facility can be used to offset the value of any stamps attached to a mail item by the
customer?
3. When a selection is made from the Select a Service: screen what is its colour?
4. Complete Scales transactions on the Horizon system for the following and answer the
questions:
a) 1x 100 gramme mail item What is the Horizon system’s Best Fit of stamps?
International Zone 1 Air Letter
Pre-Paid - £1 —
b) 1 x 2000 gramme mail item What is the Horizon system’s Best Fit of stamps?
Inland Ist class
Add. service - Recorded Delivery
Pre-Paid - £5
¢) 3x 80 gramme mail items What is the Horizon system’s Best Fit of stamps?
Zaire - Air letter
Add service - Recorded International
Pre-Paid - £0.50 (on each)
ICL WORKBOOK 4
Page 31
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
'OL00090452
@ (Cl
HORIZON
OBCS
Order Book Control Service
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 5
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ao,
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/4002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
ORDER BOOK CONTROL SERVICE (OBCS)
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Order Book Control Service (OBCS): Objectives & Introduction ............... 3
Section 1
Bar-coded order books ©0000 er eee eee ee 3
Receiving bar-coded order books . .
Redirecting bar-coded order books .
Issuing bar-coded order books .......0..-
Encashment of foils from bar-coded order books
Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to recei
Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to issue order books ........ 23
Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to encash foils from order books.26
Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to receive or redirect order books 29
Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to issue order books
© ICL
WORKBOOK 5
Paget
HORIZON SYSTEM
Order Book Control Service (OBCS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 5
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (QBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
HORIZON SYSTEM
ORDER BOOK CONTROL SERVICE (OBCS)
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this section you will be able to:
1. Receive, issue and encash benefit from bar-coded order books, using the Horizon system.
2. Receive, issue and encash benefit from bar-coded order books, manually entering the
details of the order book due to a bar-code reader failure or an unreadable bar-code.
3. Encash benefit from non bar-caded order books.
introduction:
This Workbook describes the actions and procedures that are carried out on the Horizon system
whenever a customer presents an order book for encashment. The procedures for the receipt,
redirection and issue of bar-coded order books is also described.
Whilst vigilance at the counter cannot be overstressed, the Order Book Control Service (OBCS)
incorporates an Electronic Stop Notice Computer System (BSNCS) which will inform you if a
bar-coded order book is subject to a stap or recall notice when the bar-code is read by the
Horizon system.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the encashment of benefit from order books at
the counter still apply, eg all foils must be retained after encashment and retained in value
order in the drawer.
Note:
if you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager. All bar-codes printed in the
Workbook, can be used in conjunction with the examples deseribed.
At the the end of each Workbook in the series, there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 3
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of gaing to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-coded order books Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Order books are now being produced with bar-codes clearly visible on the front covers.
Eventually all order books will be bar-coded. This will ensure that a clear audit trail can be
traced through the Horizon system whenever a bar-code is scanned for receipt, issue or
encashment.
Order books issued by different authorities may differ in design, so the bar-code and order book
details may not be in the same place. The order book reproduced below shows the typical
position of the bar-code and the book details required to carry out a manual
encashment,
Customer Reference
Number which can be
the National Insurance Common Payment
Serial Number Number (NINO) Package (CPP) number
Bar-code Position of the
Additional Indicator
(not present on all
order books)
When a bar-coded order book is presented for payment, the bar-code is scanned. This ensures
that the details of the order book are cross-checked against the ESNCS. Ifa stop or recall
notice has been placed on the book, the instructions on screen MUST be followed and the book
impounded.
Stop Notice
If a step notice is placed on an order book, the book must be impounded and NObenefit
can be paid, even if there are valid foils.
Recali Notice
If a recall notice is placed on an order book, then benefit can be paid up to a limit
imposed by the Benefits Agency eg a maximum of I valid foil. The book must then be
impounded.
Valid foils are order book foils due for payment up to the present day and still in date, ie an
order book foil is out of date 3 months and I day from the day after the due date on the foil.
The recall date indicated on screen may be some time in the future.
© ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 5
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43402
Section 1: Receiving bar-ceded order books Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Bar-coded order books will arrive in the post or by delivery agent. On receipt at the post office
the books must be checked with the Horizon system as soon as possible. The procedure for
receiving order books is similar to the procedure for the redirection of bar-coded order books
out of the post office. The procedure for receiving books starts from the Desktop menu.
In the following example two order books have been received:
The Desktop menu is the top level of
the Horizon system. There is an icon
on screen which directly relates to the
order book or token management.
on ENG
SIN AE
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Token Mgmnt menu is displayed.
There are two icons at the bottom of the screen: Receive Book and Redirect Book.
Receive Book icon (F13) is used to receive order books into the post office.
Redirect Book icon (F 14) is used to redirect order books out of the post
office.
ich WORKBOOK 5
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Seetion 1: Receiving bar-coded order books, continued seats
ot Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Receive In Summary screen is
displayed. The Summary tab instructs
you to scan the Barcode on the book.
If the bar-code is unreadable for any
reason, you can use the Manual Input
icon (F}) to enter the details of the
bar-coded books).
Note:
There is no requirement to complete the receive in procedure for nen bar-coded order books.
The Summary tab shows three categories:
sion.
- Scanned, the total number of order books scanned in this ses:
+ Impound, the total number of order books impounded in thi on.
- Unread, the total number of order books where the bar-code was not read by the system
in this session.
in the example all categories are zero at this stage.
The following steps will simulate the receipt of two order books:
3. Scan the following bar-code:
MMT
If the bar-code on the order book cannot be read after three attempts with the bar-code reader,
the details of the order book will need to be entered manually. Refer to the following pages of
this Workbook:
- Bar-code reader failure. manual input procedure to receive or redirect order books,
pages 18 - 22.
- Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to receive or redirect order books,
pages 29 - 31.
OIL WORKBOOK 5
Page?
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section {: Receiving bar-coded order books, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
The successful scan of the first bar-code
changes the Scanned total from 0 to 1.
‘tes TRS
exe RO
4, Scan the second bar-code below:
Winn
The Scanned total increases to 2.
You would repeat this procedure for all bar-coded order books received into the post office.
Once you have scanned all the bar-coded order books received, Toueh the Riposte Desktop
icon, or Press HOME to complete the procedure.
5. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The order books must now be secured in the post office. They must be placed in alphabetical
order in accordance with current POCL procedures.
Note:
During the receipt procedure the system will check the book s details against the ESNCS.
if a stop or recall notice has been placed on the book, the system will display an Impound
Notice: a beep will also be generated by the system te draw your attention to the screen.
The Horizon system will display the appropriate message. Follow the on screen instructions.
@ICL WORKBOOK §
Page 8
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Receiving bar-coded order books, continued sas
In the example shown on the left, the
order book must be hole punched,
impounded and returned to the Issuing
Authority in accordance with current
POCL procedures.
A To acknowledge the message.
PE mee displayed, Touch the Impound given
: “ - : tick icon on screen, or Press ENTER on
oe . the keyboard. The system will then
. sete : return to the Receive In Summary
ms ¢ : screen,
Well done!
You have completed the actions to receive bar-coded order books into the post office and
to action an Impound Notice using the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK §
Page 9
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Redirecting bar-coded order books ote
Occasionally, you may be required to redirect bar-coded order books out of the post office.
This procedure is very similar to the receive procedure.
Note:
- Order books delivered to the wrong post office should be forwarded to the correct
office using the redirect procedure. There is no requirement to receive them in first.
~ Impounded order books should NOT be redirected to the DSS, but should be
forwarded in accordance with current POCL procedures.
From the Desktop menu:
i. Touch the Token Mgmnt icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Token Mgmnt menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Redirect Book icon, or Press F14 on the keyboard.
The Redirect Out screen is displayed. It differs slightly from the Receive In screen, as there are
only two categories on the Summary tab:
Scanned, the total number of order books scanned in this session.
- Unread, the total number of order books where the bar-code was not read by the system.
Both categories will show 0 if no order books have been scanned.
Note:
The Horizon system will not check the order books against the ESNCSduring the
redirection procedure. They will be checked during the receive procedure at the receiving
MTA
If the bar-code on the order book cannot be read after three attempts with the bar-code reader,
the details of the order book will need to be entered manually. Refer to the following pages of
this workbook:
3. Sean the bar-code below:
~ Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to receive or redirect order books,
pages 18 - 22.
- Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to receive or redirect order books,
pages 29 - 31.
SICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Redirecting bar-coded order books, continued Dates 29799
The action of scanning the bar-code,
increases the Scanned total from 0 to I.
You would repeat this procedure for all
bar-coded order books to be redirected
out of the office,
nate am
‘Ros CHEE
‘Sand
oo ob FE
When you have completed the procedure for redirecting order books:
4. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed the actions to redirect bar-coded order books out of the post office
using the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 11
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Controt Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Issuing bar-coded order books iat Miah
Issue: 2.0
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the issue of bar-coded books at the counter still
apply, both for initial and renewal order books.
In the following example a bar-coded order book will be issued to the customer.
From the Serve Customer menu
{. Touck the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the P and A icon, or Presy Fl on the keyboard.
The P and A (Pensions and
Allowan menu is displayed. There
are three icons for use with the OBCS.
or Press F11 on the keyboard.
The Issue screen is displayed. The
Instructions state that you should scan
the Barcode on the book to be issued to
the customer.
If the bar-code is unreadable for any
reason, you can use the Manual Input
icon (F1) to enter the details of the
bar-coded book(s}.
‘Seas
‘Sous Queer
OICL WORKBOOK 5
Page i2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 1: Issuing bar-coded order books, continued eat
Obtain the order book to be issued to the customer.
AN
If the bar-code cannot be read after three attempts, the manual input procedure should be
carried out.
After scanning the bar-code, the Issue
sereen is displayed. The issue
instructions are shown in the left-hand
box.
If a stop or recall notice has been placed
on the order book, the system will
display the appropriate message. The
‘on screen instructions should be
7 followed and the order book
toons 6G impounded.
Sina
cn
‘Seem Reais
If not, the order book should now be datestamped and issued to the customer.
There are two options on screen:
~ Issue, if the book is to be issued to the customer.
- Continue, if any payments were due to the customer, the system would go straight to the
encashment procedure.
In this example the customer does not require the encashment of any foils.
§. Touch the Issue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
OICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 13
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Issuing bar-coded order beoks, continued Dates oe oe
Stop Notice
If the example shown below, a stop notice has been placed on the order book. It must be hole
punched, impounded and returned to the Issuing Authority.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the impounding of order books at the counter
still apply.
he
When the Impound action has been
completed, Touch the green tick icon,
or Press ENTER on the keyboard to
continue.
Recall Notice
If the example shown below, a recall notice has been placed on the order book. Any valid
vouchers must be paid, then the order book must be hole punched, impounded and returned to
the Issuing Authority.
Note:
If an order book is presented for encashment prior to the effective date of the recall, the
customer is allowed to encash valid foils dated prior to the effective date. All current
POCL regulations regarding the payment and impounding of order books at the counter
still apply.
If there are any valid foils, acknowledge
the Impound Notice. Toweh the
Impound icon on screen, or Pre:
ENTER on the keyboard. The syste’
will take you to the start of the
encashment procedure. The order book
must then be impounded on completion
of the encashment.
If there are no valid foils in the order
book, Touch the Cancel red cross icon,
or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed the actions to issue a bar-coded order book, and to action any
Impound Notices and restricted payment instructions using the Horizon system,
OKL WORKBOOK 5
Page i4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Encashment of foils from bar-coded order books Pate: men
Note:
To start the procedure for the encashment of a bar-coded order book, the Horizon system
must be displaying the Serve Customer menu (or a submenu).
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the encashment of foils at the counter still apply.
During the encashment procedure, if a stop notice has been placed on the order book, the
Impound Notice screen will be displayed. Follow the on screen instructions and acknowledge
the message by Touching the Impound green tick icon, or by Pressing the ENTER key and
then impound the book in accordance with current POCL procedures,
If a recall notice has been placed on the order book and the book is presented after the date of
recall, an Impound Notice will be displayed with a message indicating that you can pay valid
foils up to a limit set by the BA. Follow the on screen instructions and acknowledge the
message by Touching the appropriate icon, or by Pressing the appropriate key. The order book
should then be impounded in accordance with current POCL procedures.
Note:
Before the encashment procedure is carried out on the Horizon system, the order book
and foils must be checked in accordance with current POCL procedures.
Mn
The Enter No. of Foils screen is
displayed. The system shows a default
value of I foil for encashment.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1, Sean the bar code below:
—
.
“ A If you are carrying out the encashment
= of more than I foil, the default value
9 . must be deleted and the number of foils
for encashment must be set.
Tn the following example the customer
has requested the encashment of two
0 on foils.
To delete the number of foils you can Touch the black arrow on screen, or Press BACKSPACE
on the keyboard. Either of these two actions wil] erase a single figure on screen. Touching the
red cross icon, or Pressing UNDO on the keyboard, will delete the complete entry on screen.
© Icy WORKBOOK 5
Page 15
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Encashment ef foils from bar-coded order books, continued Pate
2. Touch the red cross icon, or Press UNDO on the keyboard.
Note:
The maximum number of foils that can be encashed in a single transaction on the Horizon
system is 13. This equates to the 3-menth validity of foils. Occasionally, a 3-month period
may contain 14 weeks, and 14 is the maximum number of foils that may be encashed from
one order book. To encash 14 foils from the same order book, the first 13 foils must be
encashed normally, then a second transaction carried out for the 14th foil.
3. Type 2
Check the number of foils entered is correct before continuing.
4, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
ey ae The Enter Unit Price of Foils screen is
ie displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the value of a single foil to be
- paid. The system will then
0:00 R automatically nvultiply the number of
i foils entered by the Unit Price.
: ES DER Tn this example, the Unit Price of the
s ] foils is £38.50.
A
Oc: 00 oo
S. Type £38.50
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
The unit price of all foils entered within a single transaction must be the same value. If
the foils contained in an order book are of mixed values, eg to include the Christmas
bonus, each different value must be entered as a separate transaction.
The Enter Milk Tokens (opt) screen is
displayed.
The system will always display a
3 default value of zero Milk Tokens. If
~ > there are any Milk Tokens associated
rs : with the benefit, Eater the number of
Pe ee Milk Tokens due using the keyboard or
é One t touch screen. If there are no Milk
Tokens due, then you can accept the
default value of zero,
Oe
In this example, there are two Milk
Tokens associated with the benefit.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 16
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/434002
Section 1: Encashment of foils from bar-coded order books, continued ete
7. Type2
Check the number of Milk Tokens is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system now returns to the Serve
Customer menu (or whichever menu
was displayed when the order book was
scanned). In the sales stack on the
right-hand side of the screen there is an
icon OBCS. The total in the icon
reflects the 2 foils encashed for the total
amount of £77.00. There is also a
separate MTokens icon for the two Milk
Tokens.
In this example the customer has no
other requirements. The transaction can
therefore be completed.
Note:
The amount in the Finish icon shows that you should PAY£77.00 to the customer. The
amount is also coloured yellow and preceded by a minus sign. This denotes that the
payment is due to the customer.
If the customer has any other requirements, they can be selected from the Serve Customer
menu or any of its associated submenus in the normal way. The price of these items would
then be subtracted from the payment due to the customer.
9. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
‘The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu. The foils (having been datestamped.
and removed from the order book) should now be stored in the drawer in accordance with
current POCL procedures. The order book transaction has been registered on the system. At
the end of the day, or Cash Account Period, the P& A (Pensions & Allowances) Report can be
produced which will break down all order book foil encashments by value and P & A group.
Workbook 10 details the procedures for producing Horizon system reports
Well done!
You have completed a bar-coded order book encashment with Milk Tokens using the
Horizen system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Date: a me
receive or redirect order books
If the bar-code reader stops working, you can still receive (or redirect) order books using the
Horizon system.
The following example describes the procedure for receiving (or redirecting) order books in
this situation,
From the Desktop menu:
lL. Touch the Token Mgmnt icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
[Token Mamnt
The Token Mgmnt menu is displayed.
There are twe icons at the bottom of the
screen: Receive Book and Redirect
Book.
ce
nN
or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Receive In Summary screen is
displayed. The Summary tab instructs
you to scan the Barcode on the book.
Tf the bar-code is unreadable, for any
reason, you can use the Manual Input
icon (F1) to enter the details of the bar-
coded book(s).
You would now scan the bar-code on the order book. After three attempts to read the bar-code,
you should follow the Manual Input procedure on pages 18 - 22 or 29 - 31 of this Workbook.
ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 18
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1:Bar code reader failure, manual input procedure to oe
receive ar redirect order books, continued
Note:
If the bar-code cannot be read after three attempts, there is no reason why the procedure
cannot be carried out at an alternative system in the post office. But if there is only one
counter position, the Manual Input procedure will have to be followed.
3. Touch the Manual Input icon, 4 or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Customer Reference screen is
displayed. The Receive box on the
right-hand side of the screen shows the
Customer Reference highlighted in
white.
At this point you must decide if the
problem lies with the bar-code on the
order book, or with the bar-code reader
itself.
Notice the Receive box on screen shows that the System Failure line has been set to NO. This
is because the Horizon system will ALWAYS assume that the problem lies with the bar-code on
the order book and not with the system. Therefore if you decide the problem lies with the
bar-code reader, then the System Failure line must be set to YES.
Note:
if the line is left at NO, the system will automatically impound the order book because it
believes the bar-code is faulty.
4. Touch the System Failure line on the screen, or Press the Up arrow on the keyboard.
The System Is Down screen is
displayed on the left-hand side of the
sereen. You have two choices
available:
NO (FI) No, the system is OK.
YES (F2) Yes, the system is down.
In the Receive box to the right you can
see the System Failure line is currently
: set to NO. This is incorrect, as the
= ‘ = So I bar-code reader is not working.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 19
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Controt Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1:Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Date: 29/07/99
‘ ‘ ‘ Issuer 2.0
receive or redirect order books, continued
5. Touch the YES icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Customer Reference screen. The System Failure line now is now set
to YES and is also highlighted in white.
Note:
It is very important that the System Failure line is set correctly set.
The system is now waiting for you to
enter the details of the order book to be
R received into the post office,
The first detail required is the Customer
I eee : I I Reference number. This may be the
: - customer’s NINO, Family Credit
Temporary Number or the Child Benefit
Number and is obtained from the order
book front cover. An example of an
order book front cover is shown on
page 5.
In the following example the Customer Reference number is 99000002A.
6. Type 99000002
Check the Customer Reference number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The system will now prompt you to
enter the next detail required, the
Fi Additional Indicator.
The Additional Indicator can be
obtained from the order book front
cover, (see page 5 of this Workbook).
Not all order books have an Additional
Indicator.
If there is no Additional Indicator you
can proceed past this screen by
Touching the green tick icon, or
Pressing ENTER on the keyboard.
@1CL WORKBOOK §
Page 20
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (OBCS) Ref PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to D aes
receive or redirect order books, continued —_
In this example the order book does not have an Additional Indicator. So you do not need to
enter any information:
8. Tauch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
There are 2 other ways to bypass the Additional Indicator:
Touching the Serial Number line on screen or Pressing the Down arrow on the keyboard.
The Serial No. screen is displayed. In
the Receive box on the right-hand side ,
the Indicator is empty.
The Serial Number can now be obtained
from the order book front cover, (see
3 2) * : page 5 of this Workbook).
Selsey In this example the Serial Number is
OL.
0
9. Type 01
Cheek the Serial Number entered is correct before continuing,
10, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The CPP No. (Common Payment
Package number) screen is displayed.
The CPP Number can now be obtained
from the order book front cover, (see
page 5 of this Workbook).
In this example the CPP Number is 051.
LL. Type O51
Check the CPP Number entered is correct before continuing.
12. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 21
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Refs PATH/43/002
Section 1:Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Pate oe Mies ;
reeeive or redireet order beoks, continued
The Horizon system returns to the Receive In (or Redirect) Summary screen. The system
shows that the number of order books received (or redirected) has increased by one. If you
have other order books to receive into the post office, the procedure must be repeated.
When all order books have been processed:
13. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Desktop menu.
Well done!
You have completed the manual receipt of an order book using the Horizon system.
OICL WORKBOOK §
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section t: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Dates nent
issue order books
If the bar-code reader stops working, you can still issue order books manually using the
Horizon system.
The following example describes the procedure for issuing order books in this situation.
From the Serve Customer menu:
The P and A menu is displayed. There
is an OBCS Booklet icon for issuing
bar-coded order books manually.
or Press F11 on the keyboard.
The Issue screen is displayed. At this
point, you would retrieve the order
book to be issued from the drawer and
sean the bar-code.
In this example the bar-code reader is
not working so the manual input
procedure will be carried out.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Contral Service (OBCS) Ret: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Pate
issue order becks, continued
4. Touch the Manual Input icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Customer Reference screen is displayed. The screen prompts you to enter the details of the
order book to be issued. However, before the Customer Reference number is entered, the
System Failure line must be set to YES because the bar-code reader has failed.
5. Referring to steps 4-12, pages 19-21 of this Workbook, Enter the following data for the
order book and check the entries before continuing to the next step:
- System Failure: YES
- Customer Reference No: 990000034
Additional Indicator: Nene (leave blank)
~ Serial number: 01
~ Common Payment Package Number: 051.
Note:
You MUST ensure that the System Failure line is set correctly. If the line is left at NO,
then the system will display an instruction to impound the order book.
After confirming the CPP number, the
Issue screen is displayed. The screen
prompts you to datestamp and issue the
order book.
There are two icons on screen:
Be Q Issue Used if the book is to be
issued to the customer.
Continue Used if any payments were
4 due to the customer, the
system would go straight
to the encashment procedure.
Note:
After entering the CPP number, the system will check the order book s details against the
ESNCS. If a stop or recall notice has been placed on the order book, the appropriate
Impound Notice will appear on screen. Follow the on screen instructions and impound
the order book in accordance with current POCL procedures.
cS)
WORKBOOK §
Page 24
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (QBCS)
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to
issue order books, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
In this example there are no foils for encashment.
6. Touch the Issue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the manual issue of an order book using the Horizon system.
@1CL WORKBOOK 5
Page 25
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Refs PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure te
encash foils from order books
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
If the bar-code reader stops working, you can still encash foils manually using the Horizon
system.
The following example describes the procedure for encashment of foils in this situation.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the P and A icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The P and A menu is displayed. There are a number of icons for OBCS transactions. The
OBCS Manual icon is used to record encashments on the system when the order book details
have to be entered manually.
3. Touch the OBCS Manual icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
OBES Manual
The Customer Reference screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the details of
the order book. However, before the Customer Reference number is entered, the System
Failure line must be set to YES because the bar-code reader has failed.
4, Referring to steps 4-12 pages 19-21 of this Workbook, Enter the following data for the
order book and check the entries before continuing to the next step:
- System Failure: YES
~ Customer Reference No: 990000034,
- Additional Indicator: Nene (leave blank)
~ Serial number: OL
~ Common Payment Package Number: 051
After confirming the Common Payment
Package number, the Enter No. of Foils
screen is displayed.
If you are carrying out the encashment
of more than 1 foil, the default value
must be deleted and the number of foils
for encashment must be set.
In the following example the customer
has requested the encashment of a
single foil. There is no need to change
the number of foils.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 26
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to ate 0
encash foils from order books, continued —_
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Enter Unit Price of Foils screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the value of a single foil to be
paid. The system will then
+ I automatically multiply the number of
: eens foils entered by the Unit Price.
ee be) aUNOT eed
% ae Son In this example the Unit Price of the
© Geass: foil is £47.98.
: : “
os
Oe OO =
6. Type £47.98
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press the ENTER key on the keyboard.
The Enter Milk Tokens (opt) screen is
displayed.
The system will always display a
O- Sree default value of zero. [f there are any
. Milk Tokens associated with the benefit,
Enter the number of Milk Tokens due
= BR : using the keyboard or touch sereen.
ee
In this example there are no Milk
Tokens associated with the benefit. The
6 : zero value can therefore be accepted.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system now returns to the P and A menu. In the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen there is an OBCS icon. The total in the icon reflects the single foil encashed for the
total amount of £47.98.
if the customer has any other requirements. they can be selected from the Serve Customer
menu or any of its associated submenus in the normal way. The price of these items would
then be subtracted from the payment due to the customer.
In this example the customer has no other requirements.
©ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Cantrol Service (QBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Bar-code reader failure, manual input procedure to Paes 0
encash foils from order books, continued —_
9. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
‘Well done!
You have completed the manual encashment of foils using the Horizon system.
©1CL WORKBOOK §
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to Pe eee 20
receive or redirect order books _
If the bar-code on an order book cannot be read, you will have to follow the procedure for
manually receiving or redirecting order books.
Note:
Try and read the bar-code three times before carrying out this procedure.
The following example describes the procedure for manually receiving or redirecting order
books in this situation.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Token Mgmnt icon, F or Press F3 on the keyboard.
lk
Token Mamet
The Token Mgmnt menu is displayed. There are two icons at the bottom of the screen: Receive
Book and Redirect Book.
2. Touch the Receive Book icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard,
The Receive In Summary screen is
displayed. The summary tab instructs
you to scan the Barcode on the book.
If the bar-code is unreadable for any
reason, you can use the Manual Input
icon (F1) to enter the details of the
bar-coded book(s).
ca sae
3, Scan the bar-cade below:
MO A
You can see that the bar-cade above has been damaged. After three unsuccessful attempts at
reading the bar-code, you would enter the order book details manually.
4. Touch the Manual Input icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Hepat
WORKBOOK §
Page 29
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section t: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to Pate: ee Man
receive or redirect order books, continued
The Customer Reference screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the Customer Reference number.
The System Failure line in the
right-hand box is set to NO.
In this example the bar-code is
unreadable, therefore the System
Failure line is set correctly. You can
therefore enter the Customer Reference
number.
Note:
It is very important that the System Failure line is set correctly.
The first detail required is the Customer Reference number. This may be the customer's NINO,
Family Credit Temporary Number or Child Benefit Number and is obtained from the order
book cover. An example of a n order book front cover is shown on page 5.
5. Referring to steps 4-12, pages 19-21 of this Workbook, Enter the following data for the
order book and check the entries before continuing to the next step:
- System Failure NO
~ Customer Reference No: 990860464
- Additional Indicator: None (leave blank)
- Serial number: 02
~ Common Payment Package Number: 651
After confirming the CPP Number, the
Impound Notice screen is displayed.
This is because the bar-code is unread-
able.
You must impound the order book in
accordance with current POCL.
procedures and acknowledge the
instruction on the screen.
Note:
‘The system will ALWAYS display the Impound Notice screen during the manual input
procedure if the System Failure line is left at NO. It is up to the user to determine
whether the problem lies with the system or the bar-code on the order book.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to D ate: 2
receive or redirect order books, continued
or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Receive In
Summary screen. The sub totals now
show that I book is unread (unreadable
bar-code).
If you have any more order books with
unreadable bar-codes, carry out the
manual input procedure again.
cae 8 FS
7. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed the actions to manually receive an order book with an unreadable
bar-code and to action an Impound Notice using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 31
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref PATH/43/002
Section {: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to issue
order beaks
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
If the bar-code on an order book cannot be read, you will have to follow the procedure for
manually issuing order books using the Horizon system.
Note:
Try and read the bar-cede three times before carrying out this procedure.
The following example describes the procedure for manually issuing order books in this
situation.
From the Serve Customer menu:
\. Yauch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the P and A icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard,
The P and A menu is displayed. There are a number of icons for OBCS functions including an
OBCS Booklet icon for OBCS Book Issues.
3. or Press F11 on the keyboard.
‘The Issue screen is displayed. At this
point, you would retrieve the order
book to be issued from the drawer and
scan the bar-code.
‘Saae 608
Sas CE
‘Pheoedy,
cape saeae
‘Stews sr
Mn
You can see that the bar-code above has been damaged. After three unsuccessful attempts at
reading the bar-code, you would enter the order book details manually.
4. Scan the bar-code below:
§. Touch the Manual Input icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
CHCL WORKBOOK 5
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to issue Pate, ae M4
order books, continued as
The Customer Reference screen is displayed. The Horizon system prompts you to enter the
details of the order book to be issued.
6. Referring to steps 4-12 pages 19-21 of this Workbook, Enter the following data for the
order book and check the entries before continuing to the next step:
~ System Failure: No
~ Customer Reference No: 990000034
~ Additional Indicator: None (leave blank)
~ Serial number: OL
~ Common Payment Package Number: 651
Once you have confirmed the Common
Payment Package number, the system
will display the Impound Notice. The
2 screen prompts you to “Pay 4 maximunt
ae ‘ ‘ of one valid voucher (if any) then
sat ‘ impound order book and return to
A Issuing Authority”.
: The order bock must be impounded in
° serena accordance with current POCL.
: procedures.
Note:
‘The system will ALWAYS display the Impound Notice screen during the manual input
procedure if the System Failure line is left at NO. It is up to the user to determine
whether the problem lies with the system or the bar-code on the order book.
If there are any valid foils, acknowledge the Impound Notice. Touch the Continue icon, or
Press ENTER on the keyboard. The system will take you to the start of the encashment
procedure.
If there are no valid foils in the order book, Touch the Cancel red cross icon, or Press FL on the
keyboard.
in this example there are no foils for encashment.
7. Touch the Cancel red cross icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Horizon systern returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the actions to issue an order book when the bar-code was unreadable
and to action an Impound Notice using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 33
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to pe
encash foils from order books
If the bar-code on an order book cannot be read you will have to follow the procedure for
manually encashing foils using the Horizon system.
Note:
‘Try to read the bar-code three times before carrying out this precedure.
The following example describes the procedure for manually encashing foils in this situation.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Sean the bar-code below:
!
I.
You can see that the bar-code above has been damaged. After three unsuccessful attempts at
reading the bar-code, you would enter the order book details manually.
2. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
3. Touch the P and A icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The P and A menu is displayed. There are a number of icons for OBCS functions including an
OBCS Manual icon. This icon is used to record encashments on the systern when the order
book details have to be entered manually.
4. Touch the OBCS Manual icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Customer Reference screen is displayed. The Horizon systern prompts you to enter the
details of the order book.
5. Referring to steps 4-12, pages 19-21 of this Workbook, Eater the following data for the
order book and check the entries before continuing fo the next step:
~ System Failure: No
~ Customer Reference No: 9ONN000ZA
- Additional Indicator: None (leave blank)
~ Serial number: ol
- Common Payment Package Number: 051
© ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 34
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to oe
encash foils from order books, continued —_
Once you have confirmed the CPP
number, the system will automatically
display an Impound Notice. The screen
prompts you fo “Pay a maximum of one
valid voucher (if any) then impound
order book and return to Issuing
Authority.”
- The order book in accordance MUST be
impounded in accordance with current
POCL procedures.
Note:
‘The system will ALWAYS display the Impound Notice screen during the manual input
procedure if the System Failure line is left at NO. It is up to the user to determine
whether the preblem lies with the system or the bar-code on the order book.
If there are any valid foils, acknowledge the Impound Notice. Touch the Continue icon, or
Press ENTER on the keyboard. The system will take you to the start of the
encashment procedure.
If there are no valid foils in the order book, Touch the Cancel red cross icon, or Press FI on the
keyboard.
In this example there is one valid foil.
6. Touch the Continue icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Continue ©
The Enter Unit Price of Foils screen is
displayed. The system has
automatically bypassed the Enter
Number of Foils screen, because you
0:00 : can only pay a maximum of one foil.
3 9 3 : The system prompts you to enter the
value of the foil to be paid.
In this example the Unit Price of the
foil is £28.10.
oe
© ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 35
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref PATH/43/002
Section 1: Unreadable bar-codes, manual input procedure to oe ee
encash foils from order books, continued _
7. Type £28.10
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press the ENTER key on the keyboard.
oe
te
The Enter Milk Tokens (opt) screen is
displayed.
. The system will always display a
4 a default value of zero Milk Tokens. If
there are any Milk Tokens associated
with the benefit, Enter the number of
= Milk Tokens due using the keyboard or
Stare Rents ee = touch screen.
50)
: ts If there are no Milk Tokens due. then
oS = ors you can accept the default value of zero.
In this example there are no milk tokens associated with the benefit.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system now returns to the P and A menu. In the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen there is at! OBCS icon. The total in the icon reflects the single foil encashed for the total
amount of £28.10.
if the customer has any other requirements, they can be selected from the Serve Customer
menu or any of its associated submenus in the normal way. The price of these items would
then be subtracted from the payment due to the customer.
In this example the customer has no other requirements.
10. Touch tbe Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement menu is displayed. As this is a payment due to the customer, you now have to
select the method of payment you are using to pay the money owed to the customer.
In this example the customer will be paid in cash.
li. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Note:
You must retain the order book and impound it in accordance with current POCL
procedures.
Well done!
You have completed the actions to encash foils when the bar-code was unreadable and to
action the an Impound Notice using the Horizon system.
WORKBOOK 5
Page 36
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Encashment of foils from non bar-coded order books oe
Not all order books will be bar-coded. Some P&A (Pensions & Allowances) group order books
may not be bar-coded. If this is the case, then the encashment procedure can still be carried out
on the Horizon system.
Note:
Before the encashment procedure is carried out on the Horizon system, the order book
and foils must be checked in accordance with current POCL procedures.
In the following example a non bar-coded order book is presented for payment.
Note:
There is no requirement to receive, redirect or issue non bar-coded order books through
the Horizon system.
From the Serve Customer menu:
l. Youch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the P and A icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The P and A menu is displayed. There
is an OBCS Foils icon. This icon is
used to record the payment of benefit
from non bar-coded order book foils.
or Press B9 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 37
HORIZON SYSTEM. Order Book Control Service (OBCS)
Seetion 1: Encashment of foils from non bar-coded order
books, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
4. Type 6
The Enter P&A Group No. screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
Enter the P & A Group No. of the order
book.
In this example the customer has
presented a Group 6 order book (War
Pension) for payment.
Check the P&A Group number has been entered correctly before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Enter No. of Foils sereen is
displayed. The system shows a default
value of 1 foil for encashment.
Tf you are carrying out the encashment
of more than 1 foil, the default value
must be deleted and the number of foils
for encashment must be set.
In the following example the customer
has requested the encashment of a
single foil, There is no need to change
the number of foils.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Enter Unit Price of Poils screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the value of a single foil to be
paid. The system will then
automatically multiply the number of
foils entered by the Unit Price.
In this example, the Unit Price of the
foil is £45.80.
@ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 38
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Encashment of foils from non bar-coded order Pate: 20
books, continued eA
Note:
The unit price of all foils entered within a single transaction must be the same value. If
the foils contained in an order book are of mixed values, eg to include the Christmas
bonus, each different value must be entered as a separate transaction.
7. Type £45.80
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing
&. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Enter Milk Tokens (opt) screen is
displayed.
The system will always display a
default value of zero Milk Tokens. If
there are any Milk Tokens associated
with the benefit, Enter the number of
»I I Milk Tokens due using the keyboard or
touch screen.
In this example there are no Milk
Tokens associated with the benefit. The
zero value can therefore be accepted.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system now returns to the P and A menu, In the sales stack on the right-hand side of the
screen there is an OBCS icon. The total in the icon reflects the single foil encashed for the
total amount of £45.80.
If the customer has any other requirements, they can be selected from the Serve Customer
menu or any of its associated submenus in the normal way. The price of these items would
then be subtracted from the payment due to the customer.
In this example the customer has no other requirements.
10. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed a non bar-coded order book encashment using the Horizon system.
CGICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 39
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook $
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read this Workbook. again. All the ques:
tions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
I. The following order books have been received into your post office. Carry out the
procedure to record their receipt on the Horizon system using the bar-code reader.
Mrs H Royal Mr M Taylor
2. You have received a book for but the bar-code has been damaged.
Carry out the procedure for manual receipt.
System Failure: NO
Customer Reference No: 990000014
Additional Indicator: None
Serial number: OL
Common Payment Package No: 651
3. The following order books need to redirected, carry out the procedure on the Horizon
system using the bar-code reader.
GRO GRO I
4, Issue the order book below to the customer.
O1CL WORKBOOK 5
Page 40
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Order Book Control Service (OBCS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 3, continued
5. Issue a new order book to
bar-code reader is not working.
sing the manual input procedure, because the
System Failure: YES
Customer Reference No: ICG63002C
Additional Indicator: None
Serial number: 63
Common Payment Package No: 051
6. Carry out the encashment of 3 foils @ £41.80 for
The bar-code reader is
not working.
stem Failure: YES
customer Reference No: 990003984,
Additional Indicator: None
Serial number: ot
Common Payment Package No: O51
8. Carry out the following encashments from non bar-coded order books,
P&A Group 11 1 foil @ £23.48
P&A Group 6 2 foils @
P&A Group 11 3 foils @
© ICL WORKBOOK 5
Page 4t
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
@ (Cl
HORIZON
~ APS
Automated Payment Service
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
AUTOMATED PAYMENT SERVICE (APS)
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Automated Payment Service (APS): Objectives & Introduction. ............. 3
Section 1
APS transactions: Intreduction.............-.
Description of an APS card
APS card payment, modified payment to match scheme crite:
AP card failure, manual entry of card details.
Description of a bar-coded bill ............
APS bar-coded bill payments and reprint receipt
APS bar-coded bill payments, manual entry of bar-code reference number . .20
APS payments, reversing a transaction... 6. eee 24
Section 2
APS fallback recovery procedures: Introduction... 0.20.00. 00000...05.....29
APS fallback recovery procedures . 202.2000 eee BE
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Pagel
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/602
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
©1en
WORKBOOK 6
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
ATED PAYMENT SERVICE (A
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
When you have completed this Workbook you will be able to:
1. Complete Automated Payment Service (APS) Magnetic Card and bar-coded bill
transactions.
a. Recognise APS cards and bar-coded bills.
b. Complete APS card and bar-coded bill transactions and apply the scheme criteria to the
payment offered by the customer.
c. Complete APS transactions manually, after a swipe card reader or bar-code reader
failure.
2. Reverse an APS transaction.
3. Understand the process to recover APS transactions after a power or communications
failure.
Introduction:
This Workbook is divided into two sections describing the actions and procedures for
Automated Payment Service (APS) transactions.
Section 1 describes how you carry out AP card and bar-coded bill transactions using the APS.
It also describes how an AP transaction is reversed if a mistake has been made. Section 2
briefly describes the procedure to follow in the event of a power or communications failure.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject te change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
eich WORKBOOK 6
Page 3
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
©ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION I - APS TRANSACTIONS
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures for completing Automated Payment Service
(APS) transactions, either using cards with a magnetic strip or bar-coded documents.
All AP schemes including gas and electricity token schemes are treated as Core products and as
such are available at ALL post offices. This allows you to offer a range of services to your
customers and POCL’s clients.
All transactions are performed on the Horizon system. The criteria set by the client (with the
exception of cheque guarantee card requirements) will be applied automatically by the Horizon
system.
In addition to transactions, this section also covers the procedure for reversing APS
transactions.
Note:
All company names and telephone numbers used in the APSmagnetic card or bar-coded
bill transactions in this Workbook are fictitious.
The transactions shown in this Workbook using the APS cards or the bar-coded bills (printed in
the Workbook) can be carried out in your post office, in Training Mode, using the set of APS
cards issued to the manager. Refer to Workbook 7 for the procedure to place the Horizon
system in Training Mode.
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page $
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
WORKBOOK 6
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Refi PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Description of an APS card Issue: 2.0
There are hundreds of schemes for client payments using APS (Automated Payment Service):
these may be national or local. Each scheme has criteria imposed by the client, setting out rules
for how payments are made, APS transactions would normally be initiated in two ways:
- A swipe card with a magnetic strip.
~ A bar-coded bill.
Before transactions can be carried out, some system rules must be observed:
1. All transactions must be started fromm the Serve Customer menu.
The post office must support the scheme for which the payment is offered. If a payment is
attempted and the post office does not support the scheme, the Horizon system will display
an error message.
If the scheme is not supported by the post office, then the customer must be informed.
Some APS schemes will not allow payments outside certain parameters set by the client.
If the payment offered by the customer falls outside the payment parameters of the scheme,
the customer must be asked to amend the payment. If the customer has offered to pay an
amount above the client set maximum, it is acceptable to complete two or more transactions
totalling the ammount the customer wishes to pay.
nw
WE
You will find each client will have a different design on their card. There are some common
features which are applicable to all cards. The training cards incorporate these basic design
features. On the reverse of the card there is a magnetic strip which contains the information
relating to the scheme criteria. The front of the training card incorporates the following features:
APS training card
I PRIMARY
982b900015012221501 «= account
NAME OF tr ¢ carp NUMBE)
TRAINING we—t———— TRAINING CA I a
CARD I LOCAL <a TYPE OF
\ Of TRE P 22215 APSOS ) SCHEME
No o_
POSITION OF TRAINING
SERVICE CARD
CODE NUMBER
Six training cards are issued with the Horizon system, which you can use to practise
transactions in Training Mode. The bar-codes (replicated on bills in this Workbook), can also
be used to practise APS transactions.
Note:
Any transactions perfermed in Training Mode using the training cards or bar-codes will
not be recognised by the Horizon system in Live Mode and will not affect the accounting
process.
© ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page?
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card payment, modified payment to match
scheme criteria
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cards at the counter still apply.
In the following example a customer presents an APS card and wishes to pay £50.00 by cheque.
ita, > For this procedure you will require:
o é on
haya
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Swipe Card APS OL.
Card APS 01
The Amount screen is displayed. The
: S scheme name has been shortened so that
as it fits on the tab. The Horizon system
has automatically recognised the APS
0:00 scheme as Blue Sea Water. The card’s.
Primary Account Number (PAN), the
card name and the Token Type: MC
(magnetic card) have also been
9 recognised,
I
ee
The system prompts you to enter the
umount offered as payment by the
customer. In this example, £50.00.
2. Type £50.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
Although the customer has offered
£50.00 in payment, the scheme criterion
for this particular client (Blue Sea
Water) only allows a value range of
between £1.00 and £45.00. The
Horizon system automatically
recognises this and displays the Value
too large screen.
Inform the customer and advise them to
modify their payment to fit the scheme.
Note:
If the customer indicates that they want to pay the full £50.00, then two transactions can
be carried out: one for £45.00 and a second one for £5.00.
4. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 8
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card payment, modified payment to match Date ees
scheme criteria, continued °
The Amount screen reappears.
‘You can see that the Amount box still
indicates a payment of £50.00. This
0:00 yoo must be removed before you can enter
‘ the customer's modified payment.
: Soe In this example you have advised the
2 ; nee mee customer that the client will accept a
oe maximum payment of £45.00. The
customer has acknowledged this and
decided to pay £45.00.
ig
5. Touch the red cross icon, or Press UNDO on the keyboard.
6. Type £45.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Method of Payment screen is
displayed. In this example two methods
of payment can be accepted for this
i - . client.
The customer has written a cheque for
£45.00 and handed it to you.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cheques at the counter still
apply.
8. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
A receipt is printed on the counter printer (shown overleaf).
OICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 9
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card payment, modified payment to match eae
scheme criteria, continued _
Post Office Counters Ltd.
15/06/99 10:05 CAP:11 BP:01 SU: AA
Feltham Post Office FAD:123456X
1, The Walkway
Kings Parade
Middle of Town
Feltham
Middlesex
Twi
I
APS No: 010001
‘Client: Blue Sea Water
Scheme: Blue Sea Water Sve: 11
Ref:
foken Type: MC Entry: 2
Amount: 45.00 Cheque
This is not a VAT receipt
When the receipt has been printed, the
Tear off information screen is displayed.
The on screen instruction tells you to
tear off the printed report.
9. Tear olf the receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible.
10. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A second receipt is printed, which you retain for your records.
11. Obtain the payment from the customer, Hand the card and (first) receipt to the customer.
12. Tear off the second receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible and retain it for your records.
© ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 16
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/402
Section l: APS card payment, modified payment to match Dates 2907
scheme criteria, continued ee
The system returns to the Serve Customer menu and the icon for Blu Wat is displayed on the
right-hand side of the screen in the sales stack. This is the only service requested by the customer.
13. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The customer has offered a cheque as payment.
14. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed an APS transaction for a customer and modified the payment offered
to match the scheme criteria using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page ti
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Refi PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card failure, manual entry of card details oe
APS cards are designed to be used many times. However, on occasions, the magnetic strip on
the reverse of the card may become damaged and will be unable to activate the APS transaction
when swiped through the card reader. Three attempts at swiping the card should be made
before the details are entered manually.
entty,, ‘ For this procedure you will require:
Ay
3 ASS. . «
aes Card APS If
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Swipe Card APS 11 (G times).
The orange light flashed on the keyboard to indicate that the swipe of the card was successful.
However, the payment procedure for this scheme was not activated. You must now assume that
the magnetic strip on the reverse of the card is darnaged and is not registering with the system,
so you will have to manually enter the details of the card to accept payment.
2. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Other Products menu is displayed. There is an icon for Utilities: the manual entry
procedure is started from the Utilities menu.
or Press F4 on the keyboard.
I The Utilities menu is displayed.
i
I The AP receipt icon is used to complete
I Automated Payments manually,
I
Ste
ton ores
ear eco
Soro Ora
4. Touch the AP receipt icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
secerpl
@1cL WORKBOOK 6
Page 12
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section Ll: APS card failure, manual entry of card details, continued Pate nets
The Token Type screen is displayed.
a The system prompts you to select the
SIP Token Type for the transaction. There
: are two types of token from which
uy ‘ . payments can be made:
Magnetic cards Mag Card (F1)
Bar-coded bills Bar Code (F2)
s In this example a magnetic card was
se I presented for payment.
I The Reference Number screen is
I displayed. The system prompts you to
I enter the cards PAN.
The PAN is the 19-digit number across
I the centre of the card. This number
I MUST be typed correctly.
oS
Note:
A small number of schemes require a Service Code to be typed after the PAN. After
entering the PAN, the Horizon system may prompt you to type the Service Code: this is
the number in the bottom left-hand corner on the front of the APS card. There may be
between one and four digits.
6. Type 9826900021012222101
Check the reference number (PAN) entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
OICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 13
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card failure, manual entry of card details, continued oe
a ee
ibe a
ee “
The Arnount screen is displayed. The
full name of the scheme is displayed in
the box, along with the card reference
i 5 number and the Token Type. The
0:00 ‘i system prompts you fo enter the amount
se offered by the customer.
I ede
I : In this example the customer wants to
4 - pay £4.61.
O00
&. Type £4.61
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
9, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Method of Payment sereen is
displayed. This indicates the methods
. of payment acceptable for this scheme.
If the customer offered any other
method of payment, you should make
them aware of the acceptable methods
of payment for this scheme.
In this example the customer has
offered to pay in cash.
10. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
A receipt is printed on the counter printer.
When the receipt has been printed, the Tear off information box is displayed. The on screen
instruction tells you to tear off the printed report.
1. Tear off the receipt produced on the counter printer.
Cheek the details are legible.
12. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A second receipt is printed, which you retain for your records.
13. Obtain the payment from the custorner, Haad the card and (first) receipt to the customer.
14, Tear off the second receipt produced on the counter printer.
Cheek the details are Jegible and retain it for your records.
OIL WORKBOOK 6
Page 14
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS card failure, manual entry of card details, continued ete
The system has returned to the Utilities menu and the icon for Chani Water is now displayed on
the right-hand side of the screen in the sales stack. This is the only service requested by the
customer.
15. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
‘The customer offers cash as payment.
16. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed an APS transaction for a customer by entering the card details
manually using the Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 15
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Description of a bar-coded bill Pate: 20/07/08
APS payments can also be made from bar-coded bills. All payments start from the Serve
Customer menu.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of documents for payment at the
counter still apply.
The bill reproduced below incorporates a bar-code, but note that the position (and size) of the
bar-codes on documents may vary.
GEN tee. ELECTRICITY
STATEMENT i
Me J. Bloggs I
123 Any Sireet I
Any Town
Lanes
ANID IY :
1876 339786
ote changes to payments bet owro sumer inioonaion 900 over
hie ia not 9 Tax toweicn
nan Cod os Rant (Pane pert Pema £ vr
27641E 25437E 2204 «DI 108.73
Quarterly Charge 3242
Total charges this quarter excluding VAT 140.85
VAT @ 8% i127
RE a SECRET
20 05 97 20 95 97 £182.12
Important - this is your annual reassesanent Statement based on
an estimated meter reading. If you are not sure you are paying
the right amount you can phone Us Of 0445 0556789 with your meter
readingsis). Your call will cast the same as a local cali.
Balence as abave £152.12
Estimated charges for next year £374.47
fais
ves iii = Mm
Bar-code od. number
Note:
Some bar-codes will contain the amount of the bill to be paid, so that when it is scanned,
the full payment automatically appears on screen. If necessary, the payment can be
amended by using the red cross icon or the BACKSPACEkey te delete the amount on
screen.
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 16
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS)
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments and reprint receipt
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
In the following example the customer has produced a bar-coded GEN tec. bill for payment.
From the Serve Customer menu:
\. Scan the bar-code on the GEN tec. bill (below).
GEN tec. ELECTRICITY
STATEMENT
FOR IRFORMATION ONLY
Mr J. Bloges
123 Any Street
Any Town
Lanes
ANIZIYZ
D187 333766
Please note changes to payments bel ow Foe nmmorintwmatian sae over
Fea et TM cy AMBRE cn AI vr
27641E 254376 204° DI 108.73
Quarterly Charge 32.12
Total charges this quarter excluding VAT 140.85
VAT @ 8% V27
waste srs c
20 08 97 20 08 97 MSL
Importent ~ this 1s your anqual reassewamnene SEEComOne Based on
an estimated meter reading. Ii you are mob sure you are paying
the right amount yeu can phone us on U845 0556789 with your weer
readings{s}, Your call will cost the same as a local call.
Balance as anove £18242
Estimated charges For next year 2374.82
Total #415. 31
MM
Ich
WORKBOOK 6
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments and reprint receipt, continued Date: 200 ™
The Amount screen is displayed. The
reference number of the scheme and the
full name of the client, (in this case
GEN tec), are displayed in the
right-hand hand box. You can also see
2 that it is a Training APS barcode
9 : scheme and the Token Type is BC (Bar
Code).
The system prompts you to enter the
amount the customer wishes to pay.
In this example, the customer wishes to
pay the bill in full.
2. Type £152.12
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Method of Payment screen is
displayed.
I In this example the options are Cash,
I Cheque and Saving Stamps.
i
Note:
Saving Stamps are not available as a method of payment for APStransactions in Live
Mode. They appear as an option on the training examples only.
4. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
A receipt is printed on the counter printer.
When the receipt has been printed, the Tear off information screen is displayed. The on screen.
instruction tells you to tear off the printed report.
§. Tear off the receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible.
6. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A second receipt is printed, which you retain for your records,
7. Obtain the payment from the customer, Hand the bill and (first) receipt to the customer.
@1CL WORKBOOK 6
Page 18
POLO0090452
PoLo0090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments and reprint receipt, continued Date _
8. Tear off the second receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible.
At this point, you notice that the second receipt has not printed correctly and is legible (or
torn). If the problem is obviously with the printer, eg a broken printer ribbon or the paper roll
has run out, the problem must be cured. Once the problem is rectified, a reprinted receipt can be
produced from the Horizon system.
Note:
A reprinted (copy) receipt for the customer session can ONLY be printed if the session has
not been settled.
From the Serve Customer menu:
9. Touch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
10. Teuch the Reprint Receipt icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
A pick list is displayed. If there has
: ie been more than one receipted
R transaction in the customer session, you
oe could select which transaction requires
the reprinted receipt.
ape
oes
In this example only one APS
transaction has been carried out and it is
highlighted in yellow.
11. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
A copy of the receipt will be printed on the counter printer.
12. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is now displayed. The customer has offered the correct cash,
13. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
Weill done!
You have completed an APS bar-coded bill payment and produced a reprinted receipt
using the Horizon system.
©1CL WORKBOOK 6
Page 19
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Antomated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments, manual entry of saa
bar-code reference number
Occasionally, a bar-coded bill may be presented for payment and the bar-code on the bill cannot
be read. This may be due to a system failure, or it may be that the bar-code itself is damaged.
If the bar-code has been scanned three times with the reader and this has not activated the
payment procedure, you can still accept a payment by entering in the details manually.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Scan the bar-cade on the bill for Hooper Moore gas (3 times).
Hooper Moore gaw STATEMENT I
FOR INFORMATION ONLY
Ms J. Bloggs
128 Any Steet
Aaiy Town
Lawes, -
ANIZIYE = call rate
San cussornr numer
2114 127876 cee
Please note changes to payments Bet awrar Wate inormaton oo ow,
mar #1 ar “thie fa not Tax meyoton
Selle Bare “Ber “pi _———
Quarterly Charge
Total charges this quarter excluding VAT 51.85
VAT @ 8% ais
ci vas
20 05 97 20 05 97
important - this is your annual reassesument raven:
an estimated meter reading. If you are not sure
the rignt amount you can phone us on 0645S G55670¥
reedings is}. a
Balance as sbave £56.
Fatimarod charges For next year 2474-82
east
Boymant dus 9 06 37 1 et £33)
Payments from Gi 07 97 11 at
MO
890003001 2223001
As you can see from the example above, the bar-code on the bill has been damaged. The
reference number directly below the bar-code is stil] legible, so you can enter the details of the
bill manually and still accept payment for the APS scheme.
If the bar-code and number are both damaged to such an extent that neither can be read, the
transaction cannot be carried out.
Note:
The position of the reference number may vary: it may appear above or below the bareode.
OIL WORKBOOK 6
Page 20
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments, manual entry of Date: 29/07/99
. Issue: 2.0
bar-code reference number, continued
2. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The Other Products menu is displayed. There is an icon for Utilities: the manual entry
procedure is started from the Utilities menu.
3. Touch the Utilities icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Unites
The Utilities menu is displayed. The
AP receipt icon is used to complete
Automated Payments manually.
4. Touch the AP receipt icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Token Type screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to select the
Token Type for the transaction. There
are two types of token from which
payments can be made:
Magnetic cards Mag Card (FI)
Bar-coded bills Bar Code (F2)
In this example a bar-coded bill was
presented for payment.
5. Touch the Bar Code icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
WORKBOOK 6
Page 21
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Aatomated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS bar-coded bill payments, manual entry of Date: 29/07/99
" Issue: 2.0
bar-code reference number, continued
The Reference Number screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
I s ps enter the reference number of the bill,
3 in this example the Reference Number
is located directly below the bar-code.
This number MUST be typed correctly.
6. Type 98269000300 1 2223001
Cheek the bar-code reference number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The
full name of the scheme is displayed
along with the bar-code identifier and
the Token Type: BC (Bar Code). The
O:00 : system prompts you to enter the amount
offered by the customer,
5 In this example the customer wishes to
pay the bill in full.
8. Type £56.00
Cheek the amount entered is correct before continuing.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section L: APS bar-coded bill payments, manual entry of Dates 29/07/99
. issue: 2.0
bar-code reference number, continued
The Method of Payment screen is.
displayed. The options are: Cash,
Cheque and Saving Stamps.
eis
eal
in this example the customer has
indicated they wish to pay by cheque.
Note:
Saving Stamps are not available as a method of payment fer APStransactions in Live
Mode. They appear as an option on the training examples only.
10. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
A receipt is printed on the counter printer.
When the receipt has been printed, the Tear off information screen is displayed. The on screen
instruction tells you to tear off the printed report.
11. Tear off the receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible.
12. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A second receipt is printed, which you retain for your records.
13. Obtain the payment from the customer, Hand the bill and (first) receipt to the customer.
14, Tear off the second receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible and retain it for your records.
The customer has no other requirements.
15. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is now displayed. The customer has offered the correct amount by
cheque.
16. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding the acceptance of cheques at the counter still
apply.
Well dene!
You have completed an APS transaction for a customer, by manually entering the
bar-code reference number using the Horizon system.
OIL WORKBOOK 6
Page 23
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 1: APS payments, reversing a transaction
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
i
2
4
There may be an occasion when an APS card or bar-coded bill payment needs to be reversed.
A number of business rules apply to AP (Automated Payment) Reversals:
The customer MUST produce the original receipt.
The Reversal must be carried out within the same Stock Unit where the original transaction
took place.
The Reversal cannot take place if the APS transactions have been dispatched to the
client (at the cut-off time).
Not all APS transactions can be reversed.
This example shows a Reversal to an APS payment made to Biue Sea Water.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
or Press FS on the keyboard.
sisi,
‘Sue acne
cP PRR
The Transactions menu is displayed.
There is an icon for Revers
There are four options on the Reversals
menu: Existing, New Reversal, AP
Reversal and Txfer Reversals.
In this example you need to carry out an
AP Reversal.
Note:
AP Reversals can only be carried out
using the AP Reversal function.
OIC
WORKBOOK 6
Page 24
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
Section 1: APS payments, reversing a transaction, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
3. Touch the AP Reversal icon,
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
CO
og
=
I The Transaction Reference screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the AP transaction reference
number, which must be obtained from
the customer's copy of the receipt.
i
i
i
i
{
I
[
The transaction reference number is in
the format 012345.
15/06/99 10:05
Feltham Post Office
1, The Walkway
Kings Parade
Middle of Town
Post Office Counters Ltd.
CAP:11 BP:O1 SU: AA
FAD:123456X.
Feltham
Middlesex
TWi
APS No: 01000] <meta Transaction Ref No.
Client: Blue Sea Water
Scheme: Blue Sea Water Sve: lh
Ref:
Token Type: MC Entry: 2
Amount: 45.00 Cheque <——mmsse,\ Method of Payment
This is not a VAT receipt
‘Check the reference number has
S. Touch the green tick icon, or
4. Type the APS No from the customer's receipt.
been entered correctly before continuing.
Press ENTER on the keyboard.
ICL
WORKBOOK 6
Page 25
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Awtomated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS payments, reversing a transaction, continued Dates eM “
The Reverse Transaction screen is
displayed, The details on the receipt
I 5 MUST be checked against the
I i - information on screen.
5 I
I
’ i
5
1
I =
Check the details on the receipt against the screen. If the details do not match the receipt,
Touch the Cancel red cross icon, or Press F1 to cancel the Reversal.
6. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
if the Horizon system is able to reverse the transaction, two receipts are printed on the counter
printer.
if the Reversal could not be actioned for one of the following reasons:
- fransaction not found
transaction not in the current Balance Period (BP)
- transaction already reversed.
The Horizon system will display an error message: Refer to the procedures in the Horizon
System User Guide.
7. Tear off the receipt produced on the counter printer.
Check the details are legible on the receipts and separate them.
8. Hand the (first) receipt to the customer and Retain the second receipt for your records.
Note:
The customer s original receipt MUST be retained together with your original receipt.
The Reversal receipt should then be attached to both the original receipts and retained in
the drawer.
This completes the Reversal and the Horizon system returns to the Desktop menu.
9. Refund the customer's money.
®ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: APS payments reversing a transaction, continued Pate: oe om
Note:
The system will automatically reverse the APS transaction to Cash. If the customer had
originally paid by cheque, the cheque should be returned to them with the Reversal
receipt. A Stock Adjustment will then need to be carried out to reduce the total amount
of cheques in the stock unit by the amount of the cheque returned to the customer
(Workbook 10 describes the process for adjusting the contents of your stock unit).
Well done!
You have completed the Reversal of an AP transaction using the Herizen system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 27
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
OICL
WORKBOOK 6
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 2 - APS FALLBACK RECOVERY
PROCEDURES
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section briefly describes the actions and procedures you must follow to recover Automated
Payment Service (APS) transactions carried out during power or communications failures.
In the event of a power, system or communications failure, the Horizon System Helpdesk must
be informed immediately o (refer to Workbook 8). In this case, you MUST
refer to the Horizon System User Guide to carry out the fallback recovery procedures.
@ICL WORKBOOK 6
Page 29
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
WORKBOOK 6
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 2; APS fallback recovery procedures oa
Fallback recovery procedures are used to capture details of all APS transactions undertaken
while the system was down. They fall into two categories:
1. Crash recovery procedures
These are procedures which need to be undertaken to capture details of transactions which had
been partly recorded on the system when the system or power failure occurred. In cases of
crash recovery, the customer has been given a receipt and the post office has retained a receipt.
When the system failure is rectified, the system automatically detects that a failure occurred
during a customer session where receipts would have been issued. When you log onto the
system, a message is displayed informing you that the system has detected that the last session
ended in an undefined manner. It also tells you to recover any outstanding APS transactions.
Note:
Kor these reasons it is important that the last transaction receipt fer each counter position
is available in case there is a system or power failure.
You must follow the on screen prompts to enter the details required for each APS transaction.
Note:
You MUST refer to the procedures in the Horizon System User Guide.
2. Fallback recovery
The fallback recovery procedure is for APS transactions which have not been recorded on the
system. These transactions may have taken place while the systern was down and a manual
receipt was produced for the customer. Because no attempt was made to record these
transactions on the system, you have to instigate the fallback recovery procedure, as the system
will not recognise the transactions automatically.
Note:
You MUST refer to the procedures in the Horizon Spstem User Guide.
©1cL WORKBOOK 6
Page 31
HORIZON SYSTEM
Automated Payment Service (APS)
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
OIL
WORKBOOK 6
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Automated Payment Service (APS) Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 6
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read this Workbook again. Some of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. Payments for APS transactions can be initiated using two methods on your Horizon system.
Name the two methods.
nw
If the customer offers to pay £100 in cash and a message is displayed on screen that this is
outside the payment range of £1 to £50, what would you do?
3. How many receipts are printed automatically for each AP transaction?
4. How many times would you swipe a card before entering the details manually?
5. What do the letters MC stand for on the Token Type screen during the manual entry procedure?
6 Use the training cards to complete the following transactions:
Card APS O01 £40.00 Cash
Card APS 06 £25.00 Cheque
7. Reverse the transaction carried out above for Card APS 01.
© NCL WORKBOOK 6
Page 33
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
'OL00090452
@ (Cl
HORIZON
Functions
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 7
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Functions: Objectives & Introduction... 00.0.0... 0 eee 3
Section 1
The Functions menu: Introduction .. 0.000006. ee ee 5
The Functions menu. .0 2.6 e ee eee eee
Quantity 2.0 ee tenet te tence ene!
Shopping Mode... 6. ee ee ree eee
PLU (Product Look Up) List... .. .
PLU (Product Look Up) Number .
Receipts .
Reprint receipt
Discounts... 6.
Temporary Lock
Time-outs . 2.6 ee ee er eee ee eee ese ee
Session Suspend 0.0.0 ce eens
Entering Training Mode .
Exiting Training Mode ..
Section 2
Office transactions: Introduction . 20... 06000 62 ene 29
Reversals 0.0...
New Reversals. .
Existing Reversals.
AP Reversals. . 00... 00.0
Remittances In .
Remittances Out . .
Transfers Out ..
Transfers In
Non Accounting Data . .
Parcel Traffic... 0.0...
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 7 0000000 ec eee eter nd 57
ICL
WORKBOOK 7
Page I
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
FUNCTIONS
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBI
ES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
By the end of this Workbook, you will be able to:
1. Perform transactions using the Horizon system Functions menu.
a, Use the Product Look Up functions.
b. Use the Temporary Lock function to secure the system.
Enter and exit Training Mode.
Perform transaction Reversals.
Register Remittances In and Out.
Register Transfers In and Out.
Register miscellaneous transactions.
a. Register Non Accounting Data.
b. Register Parcel Traffic.
awaen
Introduction:
‘This Workbook is one of a series describing the actions and procedures for the Horizon system.
This Workbook is divided into two sections. Section I describes the Functions menu and gives
practical examples of how the functions can be used. Some of these functions described are
used with EPOSS transactions. Section 2 describes various office-level transactions and shows
the procedures for registering them on the Horizon system. These include Remittances, Non
Accounting Data and Parcel Traffic (entries on TABLE 10g and 12 in the Cash Account).
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer fo a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
Note:
if you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
@ Ich WORKBOOK 7
Page 3
HORIZON SYSTEM
Funetions
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: Q7/99
issue: 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 7
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - THE FUNCTIONS MENU
INTRODUCTION
introduction:
This section deseribes the actions and procedures available when using the Horizon system
Functions menu. The Functions menu group is available from the Serve Customer menu. The
actions that can be selected from the menu can affect individual or multiple items in the sales
stack. In order to demonstrate the use of the Functions icons, some of the examples in this sec-
tion will incorporate EPOSS transactions.
Note:
The Discount functions available from the Functions menu can only be used in
conjunction with retail products (Post Shep items).
This section also describes how the Horizon system is placed into Training Mode. Once this
procedure is complete, you will need to use the training usernames and passwords to logon to
the system and carry out transactions in Training Mode. These usernames and passwords are
issued to the manager of your post office.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
Functions
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
SICL
WORKBOOK 7
Page 6
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section t: The Fanctions menu
POL00090452
POL00090452
Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Functions menu can be accessed from the Serve Custorner menu.
From the Serve Customer menu:
L. Touch the Functions icon, Re or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Functions menu screen is
displayed.
. Most of the functions will be used in
conjunction with EPOSS transactions,
with the exception of the Temp Lock
(F13) function, which is a security
feature.
te a
eas SED
suet
See Seema
PLU No (FI
The PLU No (Product Look Up Number) icon is used to find a sale item
by its product number. The item will then be registered in the sales stack.
This function can also be accessed by using the PLU key on the keyboard.
Receipt (F2)
The Receipt icon is used to print a receipt at the customer's request. When
the icon is activated, it will only print a receipt for the last customer
session. This function can also be accessed by using the RECPT key on
the keyboard.
Disc Item % (F3)
The Disc Item % icon is used to apply a discount as a percentage to the
last item in the sales stack. Discounts can only be applied to retail
products.
Dise Item Value (F4)
The Disc Item Value icon is used to apply a fixed value discount to the last
sale item currently in the sales stack. Discounts can only be applied to
retail products.
GICL
WORKBOOK 7
Page 7
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: The Functions mena, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
PLU list (FS)
The PLU list icon can be used to select a product from a listing of all
products. The selection will then be added to the sales stack.
Reprint Receipt (F6)
The Reprint Receipt icon is used to provide a duplicate of an original
receipt produced for APS transactions. (Refer to Workbook 6).
Dise Sess Value (F7)
The Disc Sess Value icon is used to apply a fixed value discount (rather
than a percentage) to all the items in the sales stack. Discounts can only
be applied to retail products.
Dise Sess % (F8)
The Disc Sess % icon is used to apply a percentage discount to all the
items in the sales stack. Discounts can only be applied to retail products.
Qty Shop (F9)
The Qty Shop icon is used to set the Shopping Mode of the Horizon
system. A customer can then purchase the maximum amount of a product
with a fixed price (eg £10.00 worth of First Class stamps).
Test Printer (F10)
The Test Printer icon is used to send a test page to the office Ad report
printer.
Temp Lock (F13)
The Temp Lock icon is used to secure the Horizon system temporarily
whilst the user is away from it. The system is reactivated by the user
entering their password.
Settlement (F16)
emp Lock
‘The Settlement icon is used to access the settlement screen to register
payments made to and from the customer. Activating the Finish icon
(ENTER key) will also display the Settlement screen at the end of the
customer session.
©ICL WORKBOOK 7
Pape 8
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Secti : , Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Quantity Tesue: 2.0
The Horizon system will always preset the Quantity for any transaction to 1. Therefore, when a
customer wishes to purchase more than one of the same item, the Quantity function should be
used. This function allows the user to preset a Quantity prior to selecting the item required.
Once the item has been selected, the Quantity will return to its default value of 1.
This example demonstrates the use of the Quantity icon to register a sale of 100 First Class
stamps.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Quantity icon.
The Enter Quantity screen is displayed.
eS The system prompts you to enter the
Q ‘5 Quantity requested by the customer.
S . In this example the customer has
ee requested 100 First Class stamps.
os)
2. Type 100
Check the Quantity entered is correct.
3. Touch the green tick icon or Press ENTER on the keyboard
Note:
It is not necessary to touch the Quantity icon: the same result can be achieved by typing
the required Quantity on the keyboard. The screen display must still be checked to
ensure the Quantity has been set correctly before continuing,
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu, but as you can see,
the Quantity icon is set at 100. [f any fixed cost item icon is now activated, it
will be multiplied by 100.
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page?
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Functions Ref: PATH/43402
Setiam 1 . . Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Quantity, continued Issue: 2.0
A First Class stamp is a fixed price item. Because the Quantity has
been set to 100, the action of Touching the icon (or Pressing the
corresponding key on the keyboard) has multiplied the price of the
item by the Quantity.
in this example the Ist Class icon in the sales si
a total cost of £26.00.
k shows Q 100 with
As this is the custorner’s only requirement, the transaction can now be
completed. If the customer requires further item’s you can continue.
Note:
The Quantity icon returned to its default value of 1 after the fixed price sale icon was
activated.
The customer has no other requirements and offers the correct amount in cash in settlement.
Since the screen is still displaying the Serve Customer menu:
5. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
Well done!
Yeu have completed the sale of 100 First Class stamps using the Quantity function of the
Horizon system.
@1cL WORKBOOK 7
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
: Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Shopping Mode Issue: 2.0
Occasionally, a customer may request a quantity of items for a specific amount of money
eg they may request £10.00 worth of First Class stamps. The Horizon system can calculate the
volume of items for a specified amount if the Shopping Mode is set on the system.
There are two rules enforced by the system when using the Shopping Mode:
1. Shopping Mode can only be used for fixed price items.
2. If the value typed is less than the cost of a single item, the Horizon system will inform you
that the amount specified is below the price of a single item.
In this example the customer has requested £50.00 of First Class x 10 stamp books.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
‘The Functions menu is displayed.
I Activating the Qty Shop icon will
I switch the system from Quantity into
I Shopping Mode.
2. Touch the Qty Shop icon,
The Quantity icon now displays the word Shop. This indicates that the
system is now operating in Shopping Mode. Shopping Mode will only
operate when used with fixed price items.
Note:
The Horizon system can also be put into Shopping Mode by Touching the Quantity icon
and then Touching the Shopping Mode line in the right-hand box.
To continue with the example, you must navigate back to the Serve Customer menu.
3. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
The Serve Customer menu is displayed.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page If
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 1: Shopping Made, continued
Functions
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/434002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
or Press F4 on the keyboard.
“I The Stamp Books menu is displayed.
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
ee
ie ete
a
see
Because the Shopping Mode function
has been set, activating a fixed price
item, the Stamp Book Ist x 10 icon,
causes the Value sereen to be displayed.
‘The right-hand box gives information
about the item selected and its cost.
The sysiem now prompts you to enter
the amount which the customer has
offered against the iter.
the amount offered.
6. Type £50.00
Check the amount entered is correct.
in this example the amount offered by the customer is £50.00. When this amount is entered
and confirmed, the system will automatically calculate how many items can be purchased with
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard
GIL
Page 12
WORKBOOK 7
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
5 : f Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Shopping Mode, continued Issue: 2.0
The Shop Quantity screen is displayed.
The Horizon system has calculated that
19 stamp books will cost £49.40.
However, for an additional £2.00 (over
and above the original £50.00), an extra
stamp book can be purchased.
The customer now has two choices:
Accept the 19 stamp books (ENTER) or
purchase One More (F1).
In this example the customer has chosen to accept 19 stamp books.
8. Touch the Accept green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard
The Horizon system returns to the Stamp Books menu and an icon for the sale is registered in
the sales stack. The quantity is shown on the icon, Q 19, with the total price £49.40. Notice
that the Quantity icon at the top of the screen has returned to its default value of 1. This is the
only transaction required by the customer.
9. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is displayed and the customer offers £50.00 as the payment for the items.
Count out the change required for the customer from the coin hopper or drawer.
10. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard
Well done!
You have completed a Shopping Mode transaction using the Horizon system.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 13
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
: . "7 x } Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: PLU (Product Look Up) List Issue: 2.0
The PLU (Product Look Up) facility on the Functions menu allows you to find a product by its
PLU number and complete a sale for the customer. If you are not sure of a PLU number, the
Horizon system can also display all products by name. You can then type the name of the
product required, and the system will find the product, so that a sale can be made, The
Quantity or Shopping Mode can be set prior to using the PLU functions.
In the following example the customer has requested a £10 BT Phonecard. You can also make
this sale from the Phonecards menu using the BT card £10 icon.
For this sale, the PLU list function will be used.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Teuch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Functions menu is displayed.
There are two icons PLU No (F1) and
PLU list (F3), which can be used to
locate products using the Product Look
Up function.
The PLU No function is used when the
product number is known.
The PLU list function is used to search
for a product by name.
Tn this example PLU list is used.
2
2. Touch the PLU list icon. or Press F5 on the keyboard.
Ich WORKBOOK 7
Page 14
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: PLU (Product Look Up) List, continued iatanhdegs
I PRODUCT
PLU List TAB ——abe NUMBER
SELECTION
HIGHLIGHTED
IN
YELLOW ~
PRODUCT SCROLL
NAMES ARROWS
t
PAGE NUMBER & NUMBER OF PAGES
The PLU List is displayed. The product names are shown on the left with their corresponding
product numbers on the right-hand side. The list contains many pages and will always display
Page one with the first product highlighted in yellow. The page selection green arrow icons on
the right allow you to move up and down the list by page or go to the top or bottom of the list.
The scroll arrow keys on the keyboard can also be used to move up and down the options on
any page. In the example shown the product list has a total of 209 pages. If the product
required was halfway down the list, it would take a considerable amount of time to access the
selection using these icons. To enable you to find the product quickly, the first two or three
letters of the product name can be entered.
In the following example the customer has requested a £10 BT Phonecard. Using the keyboard:
3. Type BT
PLU List TAB I PRODUCT
SHOWING BT “"P, NUMBER
HIGHLIGHTED
IN
YELLOW
PRODUCT SCROLL
NAME ARROWS
“= — a
3 NUMBER & NUMBER OF PAGES
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 15
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Funetions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: PLU (Product Look Up) List , continued oe oe
‘The letters which you have typed (BT) are added to the PLU List tab. The page selection has
automatically moved down to the products listed whose names start with BT (on page 19). The
selection highlighted in yellow is the first item to fit the requirernent (BT), in this case, BT £10
Globaicard. To select the £10 Phonecard you must move further down the list.
5. Press the down arrow scroll key on the keyboard.
The BT £10 Phonecard is now highlighted at the top of the page.
6. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F\ on the keyboard.
The icon for the BT £10 Phonecard has now been registered in the sales stack on the right-hand
side of the screen and the Horizon system has returned to the Functions menu. This is the only
item requested by the customer.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is now displayed. The customer has tendered the exact amount.
8. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The sale is complete and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
‘Well done!
You have successfully completed the sale of a £160 BT Phonecard, using the PLU List
function of the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 16
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: PLU (Product Look Up) Number oe
In the last example you used the PLU List function to sell a £10 BT Phonecard. Had you
known the PLU Number for the phonecard, the transaction could have been carried out using
the PLU No function. In the following example the PLU No function will be used to sell a £10
BT Phonecard.
1. Touch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Functions menu is displayed. The PLU No function will allow you to enter the product
number.
2. Touch the PLU No icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The PLU screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the PLU
mpegs number for the product required.
In this example the product number for
a £10 BT Phonecard is 059. The zero is
not required by the Horizon system.
wo)
ce)
3. Type 59
Check the number entered is correct before continuing.
4. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The BT £10 Phonecard is now displayed in the sales stack.
8, Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is now displayed, the customer has tendered the exact amount.
6. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The sale is complete and the Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu.
Well done!
You have completed the sale of a £10 BT Phonecard, using the PLU Number function of
the Horizon system.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Receipts
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
For some transactions, a receipt is mandatory and will be produced by the Horizon system
automatically. A customer may, however, request a receipt at any time. You can print a receipt
via the Functions menu (or by using the RECPT key on the keyboard), The receipt cannot be
produced until the customer session is completed and it will list all the items recorded during
the session. Receipts can only be produced for the last customer session on the system.
In the following example the Functions menu icon will be used. The customer has requested a
£2 TV stamp and a £2 BT stamp, along with a receipt.
From the Serve Customer menu:
L. Touch the TV stmp £2 icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
2. Touch the BT stmp £2 icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
Both sales are registered in the sales stack on the right-hand side of the screen. The total value
of the two items is shown in the sh icon. The customer has no other requirements and
tenders the correct amount in cash.
3, Touch the Cash icon, or Press F15 on the keyboard.
The sale has now been completed. At this stage the receipt requested by the customer can now
be printed.
4. Touch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
5. Touch the Receipt icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
A receipt is produced for the customer on the counter printer. 1 lists the two items and the
method of payment (cash) received from the customer.
You can use the Receipt icon (or RECPT key) once only, if a duplicate receipt is required for
any reason the Reprint Receipt icon must be used.
6. Touch the Reprint Receipt icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
Note:
The Reprint Receipt icon is also used to reprint APSreceipts, (refer to Workbook 6).
Well done!
You have produced a receipt, at the request of the customer, using the Horizon system.
OICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
: i Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Reprint Receipt Issue: 2.0
The Reprint Receipt function was used in the previous example, where a duplicate receipt was
required. This function is also used to reprint APS receipts, Refer to Workbook 6.
®ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 19
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Discounts Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
On occasions, a discount may be offered on a Retail Shop product on the Horizon system. If a
discount needs to be applied to a product (or customer session), refer to the procedure in the
Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
Discounts can only be applied to Retail Shop products.
®iICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
. Date: 29/67/99
Section 1: Temporary Lock Issue: 2.0
The Temporary Lock function of the Horizon system provides a security mechanism for all
users, The Logout icon, located on the main Desktop menu, will log you out of the Horizon
system completely. However, if there are any transactions displayed in the sales stack, access
to the Logout icon is denied by a no entry symbol. The Temporary Lock function will allow
you to secure the Horizon system temporarily and retain any sale items in the sales stack
(typically when you have to leave the system briefly). To regain access to the system, you will
be required to type your password.
Note:
Anybody with manager level access to the Horizon system can override a Temporary
Lock (or a time-out) by deleting the username on screen, (indicating who had locked the
system). They can then enter their own username and password as normal. This will log
the original user out of the system. ANY sale items that had been left in the sales stack
will automatically be completed to Cash. The new user will then have to Logon in the
usual manner.
The following example demonstrates the sale of an item, the activation of the Temporary Lock
function and the procedure to regain access to the system. The customer has requested a £10
BT Phonecard.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Phonecards icon, or Press F14 on the keyboard.
3. Touch the BT card £10 icon, 0 or Press F4 on the keyboard.
As this is a fixed cost item, it is registered directly into the sales stack.
You are now required to leave the Horizon system unattended for a short period of time before
you can complete this customer session. You must secure the system and retain the sale item in
the sales stack.
4. Touch the Riposte Serve Customer icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
5. Touch the Functions icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
6. Touch the Temp Lock icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
GICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 21
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
att . srannth Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Temporary Lock, continued Issue: 2.0
eee I The Enter username screen is displayed.
oo
_ The username displayed on the left of
8 displayed.
your password, But firstly, you must
acknowledge that your username is
correct.
Check to ensure that your username is correct.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system is now prompting you to
enter your password.
8. Type your password.
The password when typed will be displayed as a series of Xs.
9, Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
When you have entered your password correctly, the system will verify your username and
password, and will then return you to the Functions menu, The customer session with all the
transactions carried out prior to activating the Temporary Lock, is still displayed in the sales
stack,
10. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The customer has tendered the correct amount in cash.
11. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have used the Temporary Lock function to seeure the Horizon system during a
custemer session.
the screen indicates who was logged on
when the Temporary Lock function was
rs activated. In this case your username is
To unlock the system, you have to enter
The Enter password screen is displayed.
eicy WORKBOOK 7
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Time-outs Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
When the Horizon system has been inactive for 15 minutes, a time-out will occur. The time-out
is similar to the Temporary Lock in its operation, ie to reactivate the system after the time-out,
a password has to be entered by the user who had been using the system prior to the time-out.
) After 15 minutes of inactivity, the Enter
username screen will be displayed.
. This is called a time-out.
I To reactivate the Horizon system, you
must enter your password.
To reactivate the Horizon system:
1. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
2. Type your password.
The password when typed will be displayed as a series of Xs.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
When your password has been entered correctly and verified by the system, the system will
return you to the screen displayed prior to the time-out.
Note:
If there are a further 59 minutes of inactivity after the time-out (total time 74 minutes),
the Horizon system will automatically log you out completely, The system will then return
to the blank screen displaying the Riposte logo and POCLsecurity message. ANY sale
items that had been left in the sales stack will automatically be completed to Cash.
There is an exception to the 15 minute time-out rule.
Exception:
If prior to the time-out, the user is operating with a once-only password (normally used by
Auditors and Security staff), when the password is re-entered, a message will appear, prompting
the user te contact the Horizon System Help Desk.
Note:
Anybody with manager level access to the Horizon system can override a time-out by
deleting the username on screen, (indicating who had locked the system). They can then
enter their own username and password as normal. This will log the original user out of
the system. ANY sale items that had been left in the sales stack will automatically be com-
pleted to Cash. The new user will then have to Logon in the usual manner.
GAICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section {: Session Suspend
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Another useful function of the Horizon system is Session Suspend. This allows you to carry
out a transaction on the Horizon system and then suspend it so that another transaction for a
second customer can be carried out. The original transaction can then be resumed on
completion of the second customer's transactions.
In the following example two customers are waiting to be served. Customer A requests 10
First Class stamps and an MVL VIO licence.
From the Serve Customer menu:
1. Type 10
‘The Quantity has now been set to 10,
2. Touch the ist class stmp icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The customer then requests an MVL V10 licence but has not completed the appropriate form,
which you band to them to complete.
Rather than wait for Customer A to complete the form, you can suspend this transaction so that
Customer B can be served.
3. Touch the Susp icon.
The Horizon system now displays the Desktop menu. Notice the icons for Training and Logout
now have no entry symbols superimposed on them, because a transaction has been suspended.
The Susp icon has changed to Swap.
Customer B requires a £2 BT saving stamp.
4. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
5. Touch the Serve Customer icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
6. Touch the BT stmp £2 icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
8. Touck the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The customer session has now been completed so you can return to customer A’s transactions.
You MUST return to the Desktop menu before activating the Swap icon.
9. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
10. Touch the Swap icon.
The Horizon system returns to the Serve Customer menu, with Customer A’s transaction in the
sales stack. The MVL V10 licence form has now been completed correctly and all associated
documentation checked, so the transaction can now be completed on the system.
Ul. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press P13 on the keyboard.
12. Touch the Licences icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard,
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 24
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions
Section 1: Session Suspend, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
13. Touch the MVL. v10 icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. You can now enter the cost of the licence.
14, Type £155.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
1S. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
16. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
17. Teuch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have used the Session Suspend function of the Horizon system.
@1CL WORKBOOK 7
Page 25
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Entering Training Mode Date: 29/07/99
fssue: 2.0
The Horizon system has a built-in Training Mode. This can be used to train additional
members of staff in the post office, or to consolidate your own knowledge of the proces
procedures on the Horizon s
post office.
es and
stem, without affecting your stamps, stock and cash levels in the
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touck the Training icon, or Press Fi2 on the keyboard.
PT raring:
I The Training Mode screen is displayed.
_ The system prompts you to confirm that
I you wish to enter training mode.
I
1
i
1
I
H
2. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
I
I
The screen message will now indicate that the Desktop is being reinitialised. This takes a few
minutes, once the system bas completed all the necessary checks and procedures, the purple
(Training Mode) Riposte logo screen will be displayed. At this point, you can Logon to the
Training Mode with one of the training usernames and password.
Note:
The Training Mode usernames and passwords are issued to the outlet manager.
Well done!
You have entered the Training Mode on the Horizon system.
Ich WORKBOOK 7
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Exiting Training Mode Pate a
When you have finished your training requirements and wish to return to Live Mode:
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Exit Train icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
[ut Tram
The Production Mode screen is
trins displayed. The system prompts you to
: Teng Tang —I confirm that you wish to enter
: production mode.
Training Traini Training Treated
i Traineg Training
airing Trai Training Tres
Training Training
Training : Training
raining Tre Framing Train
Fraining:
2. Touch the Yes green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The screen message will now indicate that the Desktop is being reinitialised. This takes a few
minutes. When the system has completed all the necessary checks and procedures, the green
Riposte logo screen will be displayed. At this point, you can Logon using your usual username
and password.
Well done!
You have exited the Training Mode on the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions
Date: 29/07/99
issuer 2.0
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 2 - OFFICE TRANSACTIONS
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures available when carrying out some of the
Horizon system office transactions. These include Reversals, Remittances, Transfers and the
Non Accounting Data and Parcel Traffic.
© ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
€1iCL WORKBOOK 7
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Reversals Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
A Reversal is a transaction which is performed when it is necessary to to correct a mistake or to
provide a refund to the customer. A Reversal does not result in existing transaction information
being amended or deleted from the system. It does, however, create new information which
compensates and corrects the original transaction.
There are four types of Reversals:
1. New Reversals
A new Reversal is needed when there is no need to
existing transaction by means of a numbered reference.
ociate the transaction with an
2. Existing Reversals
This type of Reversal is used to provide a reversal or refund for a transaction for which
there may be a receipt. The transaction number would be entered to initiate the
reversal. An Existing Reversal does not always have to have a receipt as you can use
the Transaction Log to find the transaction reference number, (refer to Workbook 10).
3. AP Reversal
This type of Reversal is used when the original transaction was for an APS card or
bar-coded bill transaction. The AP transaction number would be entered to initiate the
Reversal.
4. Transfer Reversal
This type of Reversal is used when the original transaction was a transfer between two
Stock Units within the office. This can only be carried out after the transfer out has
been completed from your Stock Unit but before the transfer in takes place in the
receiving Stock Unit.
Note:
You cannot reverse a reversed transaction.
A number of system rules must be adhered to befere a Reversal can be completed:
1. A transaction can only be reversed if the product involved is identified by POCL as
being reversible.
2. Transactions can be reversed only if they were transacted in the current post office
Cash Account Period.
3. A transaction must be reversed within the Stock Unit in which it was originally
carried out.
4, A transaction that has already been dispatched to the client cannot be reversed
(ie after the client cut-off).
§. When reversing linked transactions, the primary transaction must be reversed rather
than the associated transaction.
©icL WORKBOOK 7
Page 31
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions
Section 2: New Reversals
f: PATH/43002
Date: 29/07/99
Essues 2.0
In the following example you have already carried out a National Savings withdrawal for £50
with the customer. However, when the transaction was registered on the Horizon s
was carried out and completed as an NS deposit. You have now realised that the transaction
was completed incorrectly. Therefore the NS deposit must be reversed and a new transaction
carried out for the NS withdrawal. This can be carried out as a New Reversal.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard
>
—I or Press FS on the keyboard.
eaecaad
I The Reversals menu is displayed.
There are four types of Reversals that
can be carried out.
I
I
In this example you will carry out a
New Reversal which is used to reverse
a transaction where there is no
requirement to associate the Reversal
with the original transaction.
Pee
* 4 or Press F2 on the keyboard.
New heversal—
3. Touch the New Reversal icon,
The New Reversal menu is displayed.
From this menu you can select the item
or move to the menu from which the
product was originally sold so that the
transaction can be reversed,
In this example the Reversal is for a
National Savings deposit of £50.
ae a ema
Recent eo
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ret: PATH/43/002
Section 2: New Reversals, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
4. Touch the Other Products icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
5. Touch the National Savings icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The National Savings menu is displayed.
6. Touch the Ord a/c Dep icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the amount of the deposit to
be reversed.
7. Type £50.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
8. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
9. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is displayed. As this is a Reversal the transaction must be completed to
the original method of payment: in this example, cash.
10. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
This completes the Reversal of the NS deposit. The system prints a Re
records and returns to the Desktop menu.
al receipt for your
Note:
The original transaction has now been reversed, se the correct transaction must now be
completed for the customer: in this example, a National Savings withdrawal for £50.
Well done!
You have completed a New Reversal using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 33
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Existing Reversals Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
In the following example a customer has paid £28.90 against a BT bill. However, the
transaction carried out on the Horizon system was completed for a payment of £289.00 by
mistake. In this example a receipt has been produced immediately after the transaction was
completed. The receipt will identify the transaction reference number for the BT bill payment
(if it was the first transaction carried out for the customer). The transaction reference number
can also be obtained from the BT bills counter daily report or the Transaction Log (refer to
Workbook 10). This transaction can only be reversed as an Existing Reversal.
Note:
‘The Reversal MUST take place within the same Stock Unit where the original transaction
was carried out.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard
2. Touch the Reversals icon,
or Press F5 on the keyboard.
I The Reversals menu is displayed.
There are four types of Reversals that
can be carried out.
In this example you will carry out an
Existing Reversal to correct a mistake
made earlier. This is achieved by
associating the Reversal with the
original transaction using a transaction
reference number obtained from a
peer) receipt. report or the Transaction Log.
Sa on ea
3. Touch the Existing icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
existing
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 34
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Existing Reversals, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
sie The Transaction Reference screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the transaction reference number.
The number is obtained from the receipt
(below the date and time) and is in the
format 01-23456.
In this example the transaction
reference number is 01-56281.
4. Type 01-5628)
Cheek the reference number entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard
The Horizon system will now search for the original transaction. Once it finds the original, it
creates another transaction in the stack (to the value of £289.00) to offset the original BT bill
payment. If the original transaction cannot be found, the Horizon system will
display a message to that effect, in which case you should refer to the Horizon System User
Guide.
6, Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is displayed. As this is a Reversal the transaction must be completed to
the original method of payment: in this example cash.
Note:
If the original transaction was completed with a cheque, the Reversal must also be
completed to Cheque (F2).
7. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
‘The system prints a Reversal receipt for your records and returns to the Desktop menu.
Note:
The original transaction has now been reversed. In this example the original transaction
needs to be carried out, ie a BY bill payment for £28.90. The customer s account number
can be obtained from the receipt or the counter daily report, (refer te Workbook 10).
Well done!
You have completed an Existing Reversal using the Horizon system.
@ cL WORKBOOK 7
Page 35
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Puactions Ref: PATH/43/002
Seetion 2: AP Reversals Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Occasionally, a payment made using an APS card or bar-coded bill, may need to be reversed.
A number of system rules must be adhered to before an AP Reversal can be completed:
1. The customer MUST produce the original receipt.
2. The reversal must be carried out within the same Stock Unit where the original transaction
was carried out.
3, The Reversal cannot take place if the APS transactions have been dispatched to the client
at the cut off.
4. Not all APS transactions can be reversed.
Refer to Workbook 6 for the AP Reversal procedure.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 36
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/602
Section 2; Remittances in Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Remittances are movements of stock and cash between outlets and distribution centres. Stock
and cash remittances occur:
~ When an outlet orders or receives stock or cash routinely.
- When an outlet returns stock or cash.
Note:
The manager or nominated deputy must make a written request to the supplying agency
for the items required.
Before reconciling the remittance on the Horizon system you must check and acknowledge the
stock relating to the remittance,
Note:
All current POCL regulations regarding reconciliations at the counter still apply.
Note:
After the remittance has been physically checked, the stock can be sold through the
Horizon system. But the input of the remittance into the Horizon system must take place
before the Stock Unit is balanced.
In the following example the stock listed below has arrived from Supply Division.
This stock has been physically checked and
Quantity Volume Description everything is correct. You now have to
reconcile the remittance into the post office,
100 £10 BT Phonecards using the Horizon System.
50 £2 Postal Orders
100 £4 Postal Orders
600 £5 MYL Saving Stamps
500 £2.60 Stamp Books Ist x 10
200 39p Stamps
200 £2 Stamps
2000 19p 2nd Class Stamps
2000 26p ist Class Stamps
Note:
Remember a remittance will affect stock levels within the pest office and subsequently the
balancing process. If your post office has more than one Steck Unit, ance the remittance
has been registered on the system, if the stock is to be distributed between the Stock Units,
a transfer of stock must take place.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 37
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Remittances In, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issues 2.0
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard,
The Transactions menu is displayed. There is an icon for Remittances.
2. Touch the Remittances icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Remittances menu is displayed.
There are various icons available that
allow you to select the type of
Remittance being carried out.
In the following example the
Remittance has been received from the
Supply Division,
or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Rem In Supp Div menu is
displayed. You must ensure that you
have selected the correct type of
Remittance. [f you have selected the
wrong type of Remittance, Touch the
Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME
on the keyboard.
Tn this example the correct type of
remittance has been selected. The first
item received (100 x £10 BT
Phonecards) can now be entered into
the system.
4. Type 100
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the Phonecards icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
OIL WORKBOOK 7
Page 38
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43A02
Section 2: Remittances In, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
‘The Phonecards menu is now displayed. There are 5 icons for Phonecards and Globalcards.
‘The Quantity icon at the top of the screen is still displaying 100, the required amount for the
remittance.
6. Touch the BT card £10 icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The BT £10 PC icon is now displayed in the stack. The next items from the rernittance are
50 x £2.00 Postal Orders. You cannot register this item from the current menu, therefore you
will have to move to the Postal Orders menu.
7. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Rem In Supp Div menu. There is an icon for Postal Orders.
8. Touch the Postal Orders icon, or Press F5 on the keyboard.
The Postal Orders menu is displayed. Before you can register the £2.00 Postal Orders, you
must set the quantity received.
9. Type 50
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
10. Touch the PO £2 icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The PO £2 icon is displayed in the stack on the right-hand side of the screen. Again, the Postal
Order fees have been automatically added to the item.
The next items are the £4 Postal Orders. Since the Postal Orders menu is still displayed, these
items can now be added once the Quantity is set.
Ll. Type 100
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
12. Touch the PO £4 icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
The PO £4 icon appears in the stack. The next items are the 600 x £5.00 MVL saving stamps.
These are not available from the Postal Orders menu, so you will have to move to the Saving
Stamps menu to register the items.
13. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Rem In Supp Div menu. There is an icon for Saving Stamps.
14. Touch the Saving Stamps icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Saving Stamps menu is displayed. There is an icon for MVL stamps, valued at £5.
15. Type 600
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
16. Touch the MVL stmp icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 39
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 2: Remittances In, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Mail Products menu.
17. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
18. Touch the Mail Products icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
The Mail Products menu is displayed, and there is an icon for Stamp Books.
19. Touch the Stamp Books icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
stamp books.
20. Type $00
Cheek the Quantity is correct before continuing.
21, Touch the Sep bk Ist x 10 icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The 100 x 39p stamps can now be recorded from the Definitive Stamps menu.
22. Touch the Prev icon twice, or Press ESC on the keyboard twice.
23. Touch the Definitive Stmps icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard,
24. Type 100
Cheek the Quantity is correct before continuing.
25. Touch the 39p stmp icon, or Press F11 on the keyboard.
The 100 x £2 stamps can now be recorded from the High Value Stamps menu.
26. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
27. Touch the High Val Stmps icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
28. Type 200
Cheek the Quantity is correct before continuing.
29. Touch the £2 stmup icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The final two items on the remittance are 2000 x Ist class and 2000 x 2nd cle
30. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
31. Type 2000
Check the Quantity is
correct before continuing.
32. Touch the 2nd class stmp icon, or Press
33. Type 2000
F11 on the keyboard.
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
34. Touch the {st class stmp icon, or Press F 12 on the keyboard.
Next on the Remittance In are 500 x First Class Stamp Books. These can be accessed on the
The Stamp Books menu is displayed. You can now set the quantity and then select the Ist x 10
S$ stamps.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 40
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
+. 29/07!
Section 2: Remittances In, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 1.0
All the items included in the Remittance
In have now been registered on the
Horizon system. However, only three
items can be seen in the stack.
(eneestiens
=
If you wish to check that you have
recorded all the items received
correctly, you can activate the Open
icon to view all the items entered on the
Horizon system.
This Rem In Supp Div menu disappears
as the full contents of the stack are
shown on screen. You can now check
that all the items received in the
remittance have been registered.
If you spot a mistake, you can use the
Bin function to remove the incorrect
item from the stack and re-enter the
correct item.
To return to the Rem In Supp Div
menu, you must activate the Close icon.
36. Touch the Close icon, or Press END on the keyboard.
Once you are happy that all items received in the Remittance In have been entered correctly:
37. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 41
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Remittances Iu, continued Dates 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Feltham Post Office FAD: 123456X The Remittance In has now been
11:19 15/06/99 = CAPIL BP:O1 SU: AA registered with the Horizon system. The
Remittance In Slip (Supply Division) corresponding stock levels have been
automatically adjusted accordingly. The
REF O1-14463 system returns to the Rems In Supp Div
menu and the counter printer
PRODUCT Name VOLUME VALUE automatically produces a Remittance In
BT phone card £10 100 1000.00 Slip.
PO £2 50 100.00
PO fee £2 50 22.50 The slip itemises each product by name,
PO £4 100 400.00 quantity and value. The total value of
PO fee £4 100 45.00 the Remittance is shown at the bottom of
MVL stmp 600 3000.00 the slip.
Stmp bk Ist x 10 500 1300.00
Postage stmp 200 78.00 The slip must be signed, the time noted
Postage stmp 200 200.00 in the appropriate place and
2nd class stmp 2000 380.00 datestamped. The slip is retained until
Ist class stmp 2000
SESSION TOTAL
Remittance in:
Cash and stock in this summary
Have been remitted in by me
Signature.
*«* END OF REPORT ***
Well done!
38. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
You have completed a Remittance In frem the Supply Division using the Horizon system.
the end of the accounting week, when it
can be used to check against
system-derived account figures.
©IcL
WORKBOOK 7
Page 42
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Remittances Out Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Remittance Out procedure is very similar to the procedure for a Remittance In. A
Remittance Out will also automatically produce a Remittance Out slip which must be signed,
datestamped and retained.
Tn the example below the cheques received during the day have been reconciled with the
Counter Daily Cheques Listing report, (refer to Workbook 10 for the procedure to produce daily
reports), and are about to be dispatched.
Note:
On the Horizon system the cheques must be remitted out of the office on the Horizon
system. All current POCL regulations regarding the dispatch of cheques still apply
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Remittances menu is displayed.
There are various options available for
remitting stock out of the post office.
In this example the cheques will be
remitted out to the Data Processing
Centre.
or Press F5 on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 43
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
. i
Section 2: Remittances Out, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
The Rem Out Data Central menu is
displayed. The only items that can be
remitted out of the post office to the
Data Proce Centre are cheques.
In this example cheques totalling
£2466.25 have been reconciled with the
Counter Daily Cheques Listing report
and can now be remitted out of the post
office.
4. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
Cheque
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the amount of cheques to be
remitted out of the office
5. Type £2466.25
Check the amount is correct before continuing.
The cheques now appear in the stack.
Processing Centre.
These are the only items to be remitted out to the Data
6. Touch ihe Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
CACL WORKBOOK 7
Page 44
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 2: Remittances Out, continued
Functions
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Feltham Post Office
17.45 15/06/99 CAP:11 BP:O1
Remittance Out Slip (Data Centre)
REF 01-13739
PRODUCT Name VOLUME
Cheque 1
SESSION TOTAL
Remittance out:
Cash and stock in this summary
Have been remitted out by me
Signature.
Time........
** END OF REPORT #**
FAD: 123456X
SU: AA
VALUE
2466.25
2466.25
‘Well done!
8. Touck the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
You have completed a Remittance Out of the post office using the Horizon system.
The Remittance Out has now been
registered with the Horizon system. The
stock level of the cheques held has now
been reduced by the total on the
Remittance.
The system screen returns to the Rem
Out Data Central menu and the counter
printer automatically produces a
Remittance Out Slip. The slip itemises
the cheques remitted out of the post
office.
The slip must be signed, the time noted
in the appropriate place and
datestamped. The slip is retained until
the end of the accounting week, when it
can be used to check against
system-derived account figures.
©1CL
Page 45
WORKBOOK 7
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transfers Out Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Transfers represent the movement of cash and stock items between Stock Units within the
office. A Transfer session will identify the quantity and value of cash and stock items, as well
as the identity of the Stock Units involved in the Transfer.
if a Transfer of cash and stock is made within the post office, then BOTH the supplier and
receiver MUST use the Transfer Out and Transfer In functions of the Horizon system
respectively. The system will automatically produce a report for each part of the Transfer, one
for the Transfer Out, one for the Transfer In. The users of the Stock Units concerned then sign
each others report to confirm the Transfer has taken place. When both reports have been
completed correctly, the physical handover of cash and stock items can take place.
The Horizon system will only allow a Stock Unit to be balanced after both parts of the Transfer
have been completed on the system.
You are attached to Stock Unit BB and you are going to transfer out the following stock and
cash items to Stock Unit AA.
~ £5000 Cash.
- 100 x £5 Postal Orders.
~ 30 x £5 BT Phonecards.
- 1000 x Ist class stamps.
The Transfer procedure will start from the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Transactions menu is displayed. There is an icon for Transfers.
2. Touch the Transfers icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
‘The Transfers menu is displayed. There
are only two choices available, Transfer
In and Transfer Out.
For the first part of this example you
are attached to Stock Unit BB and are
going to transfer out stock and cash to
Stock Unit AA.
oN aaa 8
e1e. WORKBOOK 7
Page 46
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
i » Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Transfers Out, continued Tesue: 2.0
3. Touch the Transfer Out icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Select Transfer Out Stock Unit
picklist is displayed. From this list you
can select the Stock Unit to which you
are going to transfer the stock.
In this example there is only one other
Stock Unit in the office, Stock Unit AA.
Stock Unit AA is highlighted in yellow (as it is the only Stock Unit on the picklist).
4. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Transfer Out to AA menu is
displayed, This menu has a similar
look to the Serve Customer menu. It is
important to ensure that the Stock Unit
selected to receive the stock and cash is
correct before proceeding further.
The first item to be transferred out to
Stock Unit AA is an amount of cash.
5S. Touch the Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the amount of cash to be
transferred out to Stock Unit AA. In this example, £5000 will be transferred.
6. Type £5000.00
Check the amount is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
OIL WORKBOOK 7
Page 47
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transfers Out, continued oa
The next items in the transfer are 100 x £5 postal orders. There is an icon for Postal Orders
displayed on the Transfer Out to AA menu.
8. Touch the Postal Orders icon, or Press F5 on the keyboard.
‘The Postal Orders menu is displayed. Before the correct value Postal Order icon is activated,
the Quantity must be set to 100.
9. Type 100
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
10. Touch the PO £5 icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The transfer of the Postal Orders is now added to the cash in the stack. Notice that the fees
have been transferred automatically with the Postal Orders.
‘The next items in the transfer are 30 x £5 BT Phonecards.
11, Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Transfer Out to AA menu.
12. Touch the Phonecards icon,
or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Phonecards menu is displayed. Again, the quantity needs to be set before activating the
£5 BT Phonecards icon.
13. Type 30
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
14. Touch the BT card £5 icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
PBT cord $5
The final item in the transfer are 1000 x Ist class stamps.
18. Touch the Prev icon, or Press ESC on the keyboard.
16. Type 1000
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
17. Touch the Ist class stmp icon, or Press 12 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 48
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transfers Out, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
All the items involved in the Transfer Out to Stock Unit AA have now registered on the system.
If there were any other items to be transferred, you would continue the procedure in the same
manner.
18. Touch the Finish icon, or Press EN
TER on the keyboard.
Feltham Post Office FAD: 123456X The Horizon system will automatically
12:01 15/06/99 = CAP:11 BP:01 SU: BB produce a Transfer Out Slip. You can see
Transfer Out Slip the time, date, Cash Account Period
(CAP), Balance Period (BP) and the Stock
SESSION REF: 123456-1-32716 Unit (SU) in the header of the slip.
Source SU: BB Dest SU: AA
The Transfer Out slip is also given a
PRODUCT Name VOLUME VALUE, session reference number, and there is
Cash 1 5000.00 information on the Source SU: BB, and
PO £5 100 500.00 the Dest SU: AA.
PO fee £5 100 65.00
BT phone card £5 30 130.00 All the products and totals are then listed,
Ist class stmp 1000 260.00 including any Postal Order fees which are
— shown as separate items in the Transfer.
SESSION TOTAL 5975.00
‘The user receiving the stock (Stock Unit
Transfer: AA) must sign and enter the time of the
Cash and stock in this summary ? e sii ang sli
Have beea transferved to me transfer on the slip. The Transfer Out slip
reo can then be datestamped.
SHQMAUTE sec cccteecsnssecccnmeecnee I j
I ONCE COMPLETED PROPERLY, the
Tien AM/PM I I
Transfer Out slip must be retained by the
user of the Source SU: BB.
“e* END OF REPORT ***
You have now completed half of the procedure for an internal transfer of stock and/or cash
items.
Note:
FOR EVERY TRANSFER OUT, THERE MUST BE A CORRESPONDING TRANSFER
IN.
So far in this example you have transferred items out from your Stock Unit, BB, into Stock
Unit AA, The user of Stock Unit AA must now reconcile the Transfer with their Stock Unit. If
both parts of the transfer are not completed, the system will not allow either of the Stock Units
to be balanced.
©ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 49
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transfers In Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
To complete the Transfer In on the Horizon system, the user of Stock Unit AA must complete
the Transfer In.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Transfers icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Transfers menu is displayed. To complete the transfer on the Horizon system, the user of
Stock Unit AA will complete the Transfer In from Stock Unit BB.
3. Touch the Transfer In icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Select SU Transfer Session picklist
is displayed. From thi
select the transfer that has taken place
into your Stock Unit. The details on
screen allow you to match up the details
of the transfer from Stock Unit BB ie
Source Stock Unit ~ BB, session
reference number ~ 1-32716 and total
value of stock & cash ~ £5975.00.
In this example only one transfer into
Stock Unit AA has yet to be completed.
As there is only 1 outstanding transfer to be completed it is highlighted in yellow.
4. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F] on the keyboard.
The Transter In Selection screen is
I displayed. Details of the original
transfer appear on screen ie destination
Stock Unit and reference number
AA32716, Total Transfer Value
£5975.00, transfer From Stock Unit BB
to Stock Unit AA.
Sete a
om AREER
She
HANS
‘eettar tn
©ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 50
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transfers In, continued Dates 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
You have a number of options available:
1. Print (F4) a copy of the Transfer In slip.
2. Preview (F8) the Transfer In slip on screen.
3. Cancel (F12) the reconciliation of the Transfer In.
4, AcceptTrans (F16) to reconcile the stock into your Stock Unit.
5. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Feltham Post Office FAD: 123456X The Horizon system will now produce a
12:04 15/06/99, CAP:1] BP:O1 SU: AA Transfer In Slip for the items in the
‘Transfer In Slip original Transfer Out. You can see the
time, date, CAP, BP and the Stock Unit
SESSION REF: 123456 -1-32716 (SU) in the header of the slip.
Source SU: BB Dest: AA
The Transfer In Slip also has the same
PRODUCT Name VOLUME VALUE Session reference number as the Transfer
Cash 1 5000.00 I Out and there is information on the Source
PO £5 100 500.00 I SU (BB), and the Dest (AA),
PO Fee £5 100 65.00
IBT £5 card 30 150.00 I All the products and totals are then listed,
Ist Class Stamp 1000 260.00 I including Postal Order fees which are
ent menen shown as separate items in the Transfer In.
SESSION TOTAL, 5975.00
The user of the Source SU BB must sign
‘Transfer: and enter the time of the transfer on the
i and stock io ts ame slip. The Transfer In slip can then be
pon I datestamped.
Signature...
I I ONCE COMPLETED PROPERLY, the
I I Transfer In slip must be retained by the
user of the Destination SU AA.
+s END OF REPORT ***
The Horizon system returns to the Transfer In Details screen. Once you have checked the
Transfer In slip is correct, you can complete the Transfer In procedure.
6. Touch the AcceptTrans icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page St
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section f: Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Section 2: Transfers In, continued
I The Complete screen is displayed. The
I system indicates that the Stock transfer
is complete.
i
‘The Transfer In and Out cycle is now complete. It is important to complete all aspects of the
procedure accurately, otherwise errors in balancing will occur.
Well done!
You have completed a transfer of cash and stock from Stock Unit BB into Stock Unit AA
using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 52
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Non Accounting Data Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
There are certain transactions performed that will need to be entered into the system to maintain
an accurate account of the work undertaken in your post office, These are classed as Non
Accounting Data, and equate to the entries normally accounted for in TABLE 10g of the Cash
Account. Non Accounting Data are accessed via the Transactions menu.
Note:
The sale of postage stamps will need to be accounted for via the Serve Customer menu.
In this example 5 Swiftair packages have been processed in the post office during the current
accounting week and will be accounted for, using the Non Accounting Data function of the
Horizon system.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Transactions menu is displayed.
On the bottom row of icons there is an
icon for Non Accounting Data.
erate
olehend
or Press F14 on the keyboard.
The Non Accounting Data menu is
displayed. There are various icons for
registering the different types of Non
Accounting Data.
In this example 5 x Swiftair packages
are to be registered.
© ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 53
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/602
Section 2: Non Accounting Data, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
3. Type 5
Check that the Quantity is correct before continuing.
4, Touch the Swiftair icon, or Press F9 on the keyboard.
The Swiftair icon is displayed in the stack. You can see that no value
is recorded for the transaction, but the quantity processed is shown,
QS. At this stage, the transaction has not been recorded on the system
but is only regisiered in the stack. ff you had processed any other Non
Accounting Data in the office during the current accounting week, they
would also need to be added to the stack by selecting the Quantity and
type of work undertaken,
This is the only transaction for this example.
5. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
6, Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Desktop menu.
Note:
The entry of Non Accounting Data should be done in bulk, at the end of the Cash Account
Period. It is only required to be registered in one Stock Unit.
Well done!
You have registered the Non Accounting Data items handled in the postoffice using the
Horizon system.
© ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page $4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Parcel Traffic Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Parcel Traffic, which equates to the entries normally accounted for in TABLE 12 of the Cash
Account, can also be registered on the Horizon systern in a similar way to the Non Accounting
Data, The Quantity of ail Parcel Traffic transactions must be recorded, along with their total
value. There are four categories of Parcel Traffic:
Inland stamped.
Inland metered.
international stamped.
International metered.
aWN
All four categories can be registered using the Parcel Traffic function of the Horizon system.
In the following example you want to record a total of 5 parcel inland metered items totalling
£36.00.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Transactions menu is displayed. On the bottom row there is an icon for Parcel Traffic.
or Press F1S on the keyboard,
The Parcel Traffic menu is displayed.
The four categories mentioned at the
start of the example are all available
from this menu. There is an additional
icon for Functions. Activating this icon
will take you directly to the Functions
menu.
In this example there is only one item to
be processed, but before the icon is
ee, activated, the Quantity of Parcel Traffic
Mooney transactions handled must be set.
me a sina
Peseta
I
8
3. Type S
Check the Quantity is correct before continuing.
4. Touch the InlPclMtr icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page $5
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Parcel Traffic, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue; 2.0
The Amount screen is displayed. The system prompts you to enter the total amount of all the
Inland Metered Parcel transactions handled.
in this example the amount is £36.00.
4. Type £36.00
Check the amount is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Inland Parcel Metered Parcel Traffic appears in the stack. If you had handled any other
Parcel Traffic items, they would also need to be registered in the same way.
‘This completes the Parcel Traffic entries in this example.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
9. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Note:
‘The input of Parcel Traffic should be done in bulk at the end of the Cash Account Period.
It is only required to be registered in one Stock Unit.
Well done!
You have registered the Parcel Traffic handled in the post office using the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 56
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Functions Ref: PATH/43/602
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 7
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read this Workbook again. Some of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1, What is the difference between the Receipt and the Reprint Receipt icons on the Functions
menu?
2. What products are the following PLU Numbers for?
046
072
244
3. How many 37p stamps can be purchased with £25 cash?
4, Reverse a transaction (no receipt produced) for a National Savings Ordinary account
Deposit of £75.00.
5. Remit In from Supply Div, (or from Other PO as required) the following items:
28 £5 BT Phonecards
SO £5 Stamps
200 3ip Stamps
1000 First Class Stamps
6. Register the following Non Accounting Data transactions:
5 x Datapost 10/12
7 x Datapost 24/48
3 x Datapost International
®ICL WORKBOOK 7
Page 57
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
@ (CL
HORIZON
Help & Basic Maintenance
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 8
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basie Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
HELP & BASIC MAINTENANCE
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Help & Basic Maintenance: Objectives & Introduction ...................-...-.. 3
Section 1
Section 2
Horizon system Help: Introduction .
Help
Horizon system contingencies ..
Horizon System Helpdesk
Horizon system basic maintenance
Consumables: Introduction 2.0.00 ce eee eee 13
Ordering consumables... 0. ee eee ene 15
Installing consumables:
Counter printer ribbon cassette... eee ee 16
Counter printer paper roll 0 ne ee ces 18
Aé4 report printer (EPSON Stylus 200) - replacing the ink cartridge vee
A4 report printer (EPSON Stylus 200) - loading paper... ..0-...0....-- 23
A4 report printer (PANASONIC Laser) - adding toner to the process unit . .26
Ad report printer (PANASONIC Laser) - replacing the pro unit... 02. 28
A4 report printer (PANASONIC Laser) - loading paper ............... 30
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 8 0600 ee ee eee 33
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Pagel
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/434002
Date: 29/07/99
Issues 2.0
OiCL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
HORIZON SYSTEM
HELP & BASIC MAINTENANCE
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
By the end of this Workbook you will be able to:
1. Acvess the Help functions available.
2. Follow the correct procedures in the event of system or component failures.
3. Install consumables for the Horizon system.
Introduction:
This Workbook covers Help and Basic Maintenance and is divided into two sections. Section I
describes where Help can be obtained and describes the maintenance that you can carry out in
the post office. Section 2 describes how to install the Horizon system consumables.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
confirm your understanding of the information in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the
answer to a question simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
The Workbooks don not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the
Horizon system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered you should
consult the Horizon System User Guide.
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
Horizon System Helpdesk
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 3
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH /43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issues 2.0
©iCL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
EM HELP
SECTION 1 - HORIZON SYS
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures available to obtain Help on the Horizon
system. It also covers the procedures to follow in the event of system or component
failures.
Maintenance will normally be carried out by qualified service engineers. However, you can
carry out some basic maintenance tasks, and these tasks are explained in this scction.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES ARE USERS TO PERFORM ANY.
MAINTENANCE TASKS OTHER THAN THE ONES DESCRIBED IN THIS
WORKBOOK, IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT THE HORIZON SYSTEM HELPDESK.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the
Horizon system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered you should
consult the Horizon System User Guide.
© ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/4002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@1CL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
" . Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Help Issue: 2.0
Occasionally, things may go wrong with the Horizon system, or you may need help with a
particular process or procedure. This section explains the Help functions available. if a
failure occurs on any part of the Horizon system, you must telephone the Horizon System
Helpdesk oni, I
1. The Info Icon.
You have already used this function on the Horizon system. The Info icon is
always available. To obtain further information about a particular icon, Touch
the Info icon, or Press HELP and immediately Touch the icon, or Press the
relevant Function or Command key on the keyboard. The yellow speech bubble
that appears will give you an on screen description of the icon, and it will
indicate if there is a submenu associated with it.
2. The Quick Reference Cards
These have been produced as a ready source of reference for you. They provide step by step
instructions for the most commonly used functions. The information on each set of cards is
grouped for ease of use.
3. The Horizon System User Guide
In the Horizon System User Guide you will find all the transactions and their related
procedures.
4, The Horizon System Helpdesk
A telephone Help Desk has been set up to assist with any queries or
problems. It is the single point of contact for all Horizon system
enquiries.
Note:
‘The number for the Horizon System Helpdesk is:
© ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page?
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basie Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Seetion 1: Horizon system contingencies
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
If you have a failure of the complete system or one of its components, these are the procedures
to adopt.
1. Power Failure
The most likely cause of a complete system failure is a loss of power for one reason or another.
Telephone the Horizon System Helpdesk as soon as possible. You must continue transactions
and account for them manually. When the power is restored and the system is functional again,
it will be possible to enter the manually performed transactions as a batch. Follow the
procedure in the Horizon System User Guide.
2. Monitor/Touch Screen Failure
If the monitor fails, call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
If the touch screen facility fails, you can use the keyboard to process transactions. Call the
Horizon System Helpdesk.
3. Magnetic Swipe Card Reader Failure
If the magnetic swipe card reader fails, you can enter details of your transactions manually.
Call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
4, Smart Card Reader Failure
If the smart card reader fails, call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
§. Keyboard Failure
if any part of the keyboard fails, you can use the touch screen facility to continue processing
transactions. Call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
6. Bar-code Reader Failure
If the bar-code reader fails, you can use the keyboard or touch screen to enter the bar-code
identifier manually. Call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
7. Scales Failure
If the connection between the scales and the Horizon system fails, you can enter the weight of
the mail item manually.
Note:
It is net the responsibility of [CL Pathway, or the Horizon System Helpdesk, to maintain
or diagnose faults with the electronic scales
8. Counter (or A4 report) Printer Failure
If the counter (or A4 report) printer fails, details of the report required can be previewed on
screen, and a report produced manually. Call the Horizon System Helpdesk.
9, Multiple Equipment Failure
in the event of multiple equipment failure, eg keyboard and touch screen failure, call the
Horizon System Helpdesk.
OICL WORKBOOK 8
Page $
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Horizon System Helpdesk Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Horizon System Helpdesk is available to offer advice, guidance and help to Post Office
counter staff about the use of the Horizon system. The Helpdesk staff have access to counter
procedures and reference systems and are trained in the use of the Horizon system.
Note:
Should Post Office counter staff have difficulty in using the system or the documentation,
they should contact the Horizon System Helpdesk. The service hours of the Horizon
System Helpdesk are:
Out of hours service 0500 - 0800 Monday to Saturday
Full service 0800 - 2000 Monday to Saturday
Out of hours service 2000 - 2400 Monday to Saturday
Out of hours service 0700 - 2200 Sunday
Note:
The full service is NOT provided on English/Welsh Bank Holidays. During these periods,
a Sunday service is provided.
During these hours, calls will be handled by ICL Pathway. When call volumes are high, a
voicemail message may be relayed.
When the Horizon System Helpdesk is contacted, the Helpdesk operator will ask several
questions in order to verify your identity and to ascertain the nature of the problem. These will
inchide:
- Your name
- Your post office FAD code
- Your telephone number
- Details of the problem.
Note:
BEFORE calling the Helpdesk, you should gather as much information as possible about
the problem, to enable the Helpdesk operator to swiftly diagnose the nature of the prbiem.
You MUST have a copy of the Horizon System User Guide to hand when contacting the
Horizon System Helpdesk, as it may be referred to during the call.
‘The operator will attempt to resolve or diagnose the problem during this initial telephone call.
The information will be recorded onto a Helpdesk system and allocated a unique call reference
number. Once the problem has been diagnosed, the operator will give you the call reference
number and what action to expect next. This call reference number should be recorded and
quoted if you need to ring the Helpdesk about this problem again.
If your query or problem is not resolved during the initial telephone call, the Helpdesk will
advise you of the date and time by which you will next be contacted. This contact will take the
form of either: « site visit by an engineer, or a telephone call from someone in the ICL Pathway
support chain.
Horizon System Helpdesk
©mcL WORKBOOK 8
Page 9
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Horizon system basic maintenance pat
1. The Processor
Do keep the outside clean. Wipe the casing with a dry
cloth.
Do not remove any connections or attach anything
to the system.
Do not pile other items around the processor, as it
needs to be well ventilated to operate effectively.
De not move the processor, as this may cause damage.
De not allow the processor to become damp or wet,
De not switch off the processor except in an
emergency or when instructed to do so by the Horizon
System Helpdesk.
2. The Keyboard
Do make sure the magnetic swipe card reader is clean
and free from obstruction.
Do make sure the smart card reader is clean and free
from obstruction.
Do not place food or drinks sear to the keyboard.
Do keep the keyboard clean and free from dust, using
screen wipes.
A single cleaning card is supplied to help keep the swipe card reader clean. Ensure the
cleaning strip is facing you and at the bottom of the card. Draw the card through the slot two
or three times. This action should be carried out weekly. Ensure the cleaning card is kept in a
safe place, as only one is issued to your post office.
Paper
3. The Counter Printer Roll Ribbon
De keep a spare supply of ribbons and paper for the printer. Cassette
Do only use authorised materials for printing.
De switch off the printer when not in use for long periods,
eg overnight.
If the paper looks dirty after printing, Remove the Paper Roll and Ribbon Cassette from the
printer (refer to pages 16-19). Apply a small amount of the supplied Horizon anti-static cleaner
to a clean, lint-free cloth. Wipe across the visible area of the large rubber roller. Dry the roller
with a second dry lint-free cloth. Press the FEED button to advance the roller to an uncleaned
portion and Repeat the process until the whole roller has been cleaned. Replace the Paper Roll
and Ribbon Cassette.
GICL
HORIZON SYSTEM Heip & Basic Maintenance
Section 1: Horizon system basic maintenance, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
4. The Monitor
De switch off the monitor before cleaning.
Do switch off the monitor when not in use for long periods.
Do wipe the monitor at regular periods with the supplied
anti-static cleaner and lint-free cloth.
§. Bar-code Reader
De clean the scan window using the supplied screen wipes.
6. Ad Report Printer - PANASONIC Laser
Do switch off the printer before cleaning.
Do clean the printer's casing, when it becomes dirty, with a clean
lint-free cloth dampened with the supplied Horizon anti-static
cleaner.
7. Ad Report Printer - EPSON Stylus 200
Do clean the printer’s casing, when it becomes dirty, with a clean
lint-free cloth dampened with the supplied Horizon anti-static
cleaner.
If print quality diminishes, use the printer's built-in print head
cleaning cycle to ensure that the nozzles are delivering ink
properly. Clean the print head as follows. Press the Cleaning
button on the control panel, the power light will flash during the
cleaning cycle. Carry out a specimen print as follows: Switch off
the printer, hold down the Cleaning button and then turn on the
printer. The test print will then be produced on two sheets of
paper. The Load/Eject button will need to be pressed after the
first sheet is printed.
ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 11
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
WORKBOOK 8
Page 12
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/02
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 2 - CONSUMABLES
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures necessary to order and install consumables on
the Horizon system printers.
©@1IcL WORKBOOK 8
Page 13
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref; PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
@1CL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 14
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Ordering consumables Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Consumables delivered with the Horizon systent
Per Counter Position:
- 3single ply tally rolls, for use with the counter printer.
- I counter printer ribbon. The counter printer will also have a ribbon pre-installed when
delivered.
Per Outlet:
- 1 pack of Ad size paper (500 sheets) for use with the A4 report printer.
- The required consumables for the A4 report printer ie ink-jet cartridge or laser
toner and drum will all be pre-installed on delivery.
Further supplies of Horizon consumables can be obtained as follows:
1. Complete an order form in the Horizon Consumables Order Pack, indicating your
requirements.
2. Post the top copy of the order form direct to the supplier Dataform, using the label
provided.
3. Retain the bottom copy of the form to check the goods on receipt.
The order will normally be delivered within 3 working days of posting the order form.
If the order is not received within 7 working days, contact Dataform direct on:
Quote your order number shown on the top right-hand corner of the order form.
Emergency orders
Emergency orders can be delivered within 24 hours. They can be placed by telephoning
Dataform on:
WORKBOOK 8
Page 15
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: counter printer ribbon cassette
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
the ribbon cassette as follows:
Step 1.
pull the Cassette straight up.
Note:
Caution ~ the Printhead may be hot!
Installing or changing the counter printer ribbon cassette:
Follow the instructions carefully and do not force the cassette into place.
You need to change the counter printer ribbon cassette when print quality deteriorates. Change
Switch off the printer and open the Cassette Cover (front). If a used ribbon cassette is to be
removed, grasp both sides of the Cassette, lift and rock the Cassette back and forth. Do not
I Step 2.
_ Rock the Ribbon Cassette forward, towards
the Printhead and then press down on it until
Holding the Cassette with the Mylar Guide
facing away from you, insert the Front of the
Cassette into the Carriage. It is important to
fit the front edge of the Cassette into the
Carriage first. Do not place the Cassette flat
on the carriage.
the Tabs on the Ribbon Cassette snap into the
the Clamps.
ICL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 16
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: counter printer ribbon anes
cassette, continued _
I
I
i
t
I
I
Note:
The old Ribbon Cassette can be disposed locally using the new cassette s wrapping and
box,
Step 4.
Tighten the ribbon by turning the Knob on
the Cassette clockwise.
Step 5.
Close the Cassette Cover.
Step 6.
Switch on the printer back.
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 17
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 2: Installing consumables: counter printer paper roll
POL00090452
POL00090452
Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Loading and removing the counter printer paper roll:
Change the paper when the READY light flashes orange and green. This indicates that the
paper supply is low. If no action is taken the printer will stop. The paper must be changed
before the printer will resume operating.
Load paper as follows:
Pager
RESUME
Step 1.
Open the Paper Cover (rear). If the paper is
to be changed, remove the used roll by
pressing the FEED and RESUME buttons at
the same time. This removes unused paper
from the printer safely.
Do not pull on the paper to remove unused
paper from the printer.
Step 2.
Tear off a clean edge on the new roll and fold
the paper straight. This makes if easier to
load the paper.
Step 3.
Place the roll in the printer so the paper
unwinds from the bottom towards the front.
©
HCL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: counter printer paper ote
roll, continued i
Step 4.
Slide the edge of the paper over the small
roller (Receipt Roller) and into the gap
between the small roller and the large rubber
roller.
Cie
Step 5.
Turn on the printer, if it is not already on, and
press and hold the FEED button.
Step 6.
With slight downward pressure, the receipt
paper will feed through the printer and out.
Continue until 12 inches of paper have fed
through, and then release the FEED button.
Step 7.
Thread the receipt paper through the slot in the top cover (rear), close the paper cover, and tear
off any excess receipt paper.
Note:
If at any time the paper does not feed, repeat Steps 1-7. If this deesn t work, remove the
paper roll and start again.
©ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 19
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: Ad report printer (EPSON Dates 25S
Stylus 206) - replacing the ink cartridge ~
‘There are two types of Ad report printer issued with the Horizon system, the EPSON Stylus
200 and the less common PANASONIC Laser. Ensure you order the correct consumables for
your type of printer.
A4 report printer (EPSON Stylus 200) - replacing the ink cartridge:
The printer’s Ink Out light tells you when it is time to replace an ink cartridge. A flashing Ink
Out light indicates that the cartridge is low on ink. When an ink cartridge is empty, the printer
stops automatically and the Ink Out light is lit continuously.
Note:
Do not replace the ink cartridge with a new one before the Ink Out light flashes, otherwise
the ink end indicator will not work correctly with the new ink cartridge.
Replace the ink cartridge as follows:
Step 1.
Make sure that the Ink Out light is flashing or
lit continuously and that the printer is not
printing. (De net turn off the printer).
Step 2.
Open the printer cover using the tabs on both
sides.
Step 3.
Hold down the Lead/Eject button for about
five seconds until the printhead unit moves
left slightly to the cartridge replacement
position. The Power light begins flashing.
Note:
Caution - do not move the printhead unit
py hand. Always use the Load/Eject
button to move it, otherwise you may
damage the printer.
Note:
The printhead automatically returns to the
home (far right) position after about 60
seconds if you do not begin the
replacement.
Step 4.
Lift up the ink cartridge clamp as far as it will
go. When you do, the cartridge will partly
rise out of the ink cartridge holder.
Ich WORKBOOK 8
Page 20
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (EPSON ete,
Stylus 200) - replacing the ink cartridge, continued _
Step 5.
Lift the cartridge out of the printer and
dispose of it locally using the new cartridge’s
wrapping. Do not take the used cartridge
apart or try to refill it.
Note:
Warning - if ink gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly with soap and water. If
ink gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water and seek medical
advice.
Step 6.
Open the ink cartridge wrapping. Remove the throw-away tape seal from the top of the car-
tridge as described on the wrapping.
Note:
Caution - You MUST remove the threw-away tape seal from the top of the new cartridge.
Leaving the tape on when you install the cartridge will permanently damage the
cartridge. Do not remove the tape seal from the bottom of the cartridge. Hf you remove
the tape seal, ink will leak from the cartridge.
I Step 7.
I With the label face-up and the arrow mark
pointing to the rear, lower the ink cartridge
into the holder. De not push down on the ink
cartridge.
© ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 21
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43402
Section 2: Installing consumables: Ad report printer (EPSON
Stylus 200) - replacing the ink cartridge, continued
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Step 8.
Press the ink cartridge clamp down until it
locks into place.
Note:
Caution - once you have installed the ink
cartridge, do not epen the clamp again
until you next replace the ink cartridge.
Otherwise, the cartridge may become
unusable.
Step 9.
Press the Load/Eject button to return the printhead unit to its home (far right) position. The
printer charges the ink delivery system.
Note:
Even if you do not press the Load/Eject button, the printhead automatically returns to the
home (far right) position about 60 seconds after you replace the ink cartridge.
Note:
Caution - during the ink charging pracess, the Power light flashes. Never turn off the
printer while the Power light is flashing. Doing so can result in incomplete charging of
printer ink.
Step 10.
Close the printer cover.
The procedure described above has demonstrated the action required to replace the ink
cartridge for the EPSON Stylus 200 report printer. Always ensure you have a spare ink
cartridge available.
©ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: Ad report printer (EPSON pate
Stylus 200) - leading paper
Load paper as follows:
/
Ad report printer (EPSON Stylus 200) - loading paper
Step 1.
Make sure that the paper thickness lever is set
to the plain paper position.
Step 2.
Push down the left edge guide lock lever (1)
and slide the left edge guide (2) to the left as
far as it will go.
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 23
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (EPSON
Stylus 200) - loading paper, continued
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Paper
Support
Sheet Feeder
I paper being used for printing as shown in the
I diagram on the left.
Step 3.
Fan the stack of paper, then tap it on a flat
surface to even the edges.
Step 4.
The printable side of the paper is indicated by
the arrow on the paper packet. Holding the
printable side towards you, rt it gently
into the printer and rest it against the Paper
Support. This ensures that the paper is
properly loaded in the paper path.
Step 5.
Load a stack of paper with the right edge of
the paper resting against the right side of the
Sheet Feeder.
Step 6.
Slide the left edge guide (1) against the left
edge of the paper, then set the lock lever
up (2) to secure the left edge guide.
Setting the paper thickness lever
The paper thickness lever has two settings:
Plain Paper and Thick Paper. You should set
the lever to the position that best suits the
Note:
When you are changing this setting, make
sure that the printer is paused and that
there is ne paper in the Sheet Feeder or
Paper Path.
ICL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 24
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: Ad report printer (EPSON Dates oor
Stylus 260) - loading paper, continued a
Setting the Adjust Lever
If ink smears on your print-outs, or is faint,
set the Adjust Lever to the + position.
To change the setting, open the printer cover
and position the lever as shown on the left.
Note:
When you are changing this setting, make
sure that the printer is paused and that
there is no paper in the Sheet Feeder or
Paper Path.
Adjust Lever
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 25
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (PANASONIC pate
Laser) - adding toner to the process unit i
The other type of Ad report printer sometimes issued with the Horizon systems is the
PANASONIC Laser.
A4 report printer (PANASONIC Laser) ~ adding toner to the process unit:
if the Toner/Process Unit indicator light is blinking slowly (with an interval of about 2.5
seconds), the toner may be empty. You should add toner to the process unit as described below.
Note:
If the Toner/Process Unit indicator light is lit continuously or blinking quickly (with an
interval of about 1 second), you need to install a new process unit (refer to Page 28 this
Workbook).
Add toner to the process unit as follows:
Step 1.
i Switch off the printer. Open the left Cover of
dil the printer by gently pulling the Cover release
tab.
S
oe
=
ve
oe
oe
oe
z
~
“
Step 2.
Hold the green labelled tabs and pull the
process unit towards you to remove it.
Notes:
1. De not touch the green drum surface.
2. De not expose the process unit to light for more than five minutes or to direct sunlight.
©ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (PANASONIC pate
Laser) - adding toner to the process unit, continued
Step 3.
Open the toner cover of the process unit.
Step 4.
Remove the protective cover from the toner
cartridge.
Step 5.
Place the toner cartridge on the process unit,
and slide the toner cartridge to the left until it
stops.
Step 6.
Shake the process unit and tap the toner
cartridge to let the toner fall into the process
unit.
Step 7.
Remove the toner cartridge by sliding it to
the right and lifting.
Step 8.
Close the toner cover on the process unit,
Step 9.
Hold the green labelled tabs and push the
process unit firmly into the printer to reinstall
it.
Step 10.
Close the left cover of the printer. Dispose of
the empty toner cartridge locally, using the
opened wrapping.
i iN ANANAAAANAURUA RN
®ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: Ad report printer (PANASONIC tae
Laser) - replacing the process unit
Replacing the process unit
Notes:
Te prevent any damage to the process unit, observe the following precautions:
~ Do not touch the green drum surface.
~ Lift the process unit by holding the green labelled tabs.
- Do not expose the process unit to light for more than five minutes, or to direct sunlight.
~ Deo not keep the process unit near dust or dirt.
~ Do not place the process unit in a high humidity area.
Step 1.
Switch off the printer. Open the left Cover of
the printer by gently pulling the Cover release
tab.
Step 2.
Hold the green labelled tabs and pull the
process unit towards you to remove it,
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (PANASONIC pate, a
Laser) - replacing the process unit, continued i
Step 3.
Open the plastic bag containing the new
I process unit and remove the unit.
Step 4.
Remove the sealing film (1).
Remove the protective sheet (2).
Remove the tapes (3).
I Step 5.
Hold the green labelled tabs and push the
process unit firmly into the printer to reinstall
it. Dispose of the ‘old’ process unit locally,
using the new unit's wrapping.
Step 6.
Close the left Cover of the printer. Switch on
the printer.
The last two examples have demonstrated the actions required to add toner or replace the
process unit of the PANASONIC Laser Ad report printer. Always ensure you have a spare
process unit and toner cartridge available.
ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 29
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (PANASONIC
Laser) - loading paper
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/09
Issue: 2.0
Load paper as follows:
Note:
The printer may be left switched on when you are leading paper.
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Open the paper tray.
Step 4.
paper width.
Open the output tray (top cover).
Extend the paper support by sliding it upward
Separate the Guide caps to the approximate
width of the paper. Refer to the size indica-
tors above the paper guides for accurate
©ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Help & Basic Maintenance Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Installing consumables: A4 report printer (PANASONIC Pater ean .
Laser) - leading paper, continued
Step 5.
Fan the stack of paper, then tap it on a flat
surface to even the edges.
Note:
It is possible te load up to 100 sheets of 80
g/m? paper in the paper tray.
Step 6.
Place the paper in the paper tray and adjust
the guide caps to the paper size. The height
of paper should not exceed the limit mark on
the Guide caps, or it may cause a paper jam.
if the paper guides are not adjusted properly, the printout may be skewed.
Note:
Do not load paper of different types or thickness in the paper tray at one time as this may
cause a paper jam.
Note:
When more paper is added to the paper tray, the remaining paper must first be removed
from the tray and then the entire stack of paper placed into the tray.
Note:
Do net allow more than SO sheets to accumulate in the output tray, as this may cause a
paper jam.
©ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 31
HORIZON SYSTEM
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002,
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
©ICL
WORKBOOK 8
Page 32
Help & Basic Maintenance
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002,
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 8
1. Name two sources of Help available to users.
2. On which days is the Horizon System Helpdesk NOT available?
we
your identity.
Name three questions that you may be asked, by the Horizon System Helpdesk to verify
swipe card reader?
4, What document must you have to hand when telephoning the Horizon System Helpdesk?
5. How frequently is it recommended that you use the cleaning card for the keyboard magnetic
@ICL WORKBOOK 8
Page 33
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POST y,
OFFICE
HORIZON
Office Administration
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 9
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
OFFICE ADMINISTRATION
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Office Administration: Objectives & Introduction ........0.0.000.0.0......0. 3
Section I
Post Office Log On: Objectives & Introduction ..........0.0000..0.0...0045 5
ae Connect the post office to the Post Office Network (Post Office Log On) . ..7
Section 2
System Administration: Objectives & Intraduction ..............-....-. 13
Usernames oe ee cee nee renee nee 18
Passwords
Add a new user... . <e . 17
Change a password (Modify User) 00000000 ee eee 22
Delete @ user oo. ee ee ee oe!
Stock Unit introduction
Create a Stock Unit ....
Attach a user to a Stock Unit 22.000 0 eee eee
Attach a user to the Default Stock Unit .
Delete a Stock Unit...
View Stock Unit functions
Activity Sheet I Workbook 906000 oo een ee 41
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 1
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
OFFICE ADMINISTRATION
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
By the end of this Workbook you will be able to:
1, Connect the Horizon systems in the post office to the Post Office Network (Post Office
Log On).
Create and delete users on the Horizon system.
Change a user's password.
Create and delete Stock Units.
Attach users to a Stock Unit.
YOR wh
Introduction:
This Workbook describes the actions and procedures for the administration of the Horizon
system and is divided into two sections. Section I describes the action required to connect the
post office to the Post Office Network, a procedure called POLO (Post Office Log On).
Section 2 describes the administration functions of the Horizon system, including how to add
users and Stock Units.
At the end of each Workbook in the series there is an activity sheet which allows you to
practise the transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a
question, simply re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
Note:
If you are carrying out any of these training examples in the post office, the Horizon
system must be placed in Training Mode by the manager. You must have manager level
access on the Horizon system to carry out most of the procedures described in this
Workbook.
The Workbooks do not cover every possible transaction which you can perform on the Horizon
system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not covered, you should consult the
Horizon System User Guide,
Note:
The Workbooks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
WORKBOOK 9
Page 3
HORIZON SYSTEM
Office Administration
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 9
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - POST OFFICE LOG ON
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures which need to be followed to connect the post
office to the Post Office Network after installation of the Horizon system. The Post Office Log
On (POLO) procedure should only be carried out once. After that, a modified procedure should
be carried out to reconnect the post office to the Network after a power failure or a processor
replacement. To assist you with the POLO procedure, the Horizon Field Support Officer
(HFSO) will be present in the post office after the Horizon system installation.
Note:
The POLO procedure cannot be practised when the Horizon system is operating in
Training Mode. If you need to carry out the POLOprocedure in the post office when the
HFSO is not present, refer to the procedures in the Horizon System User Guide.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
Office Administration
POL00090452
POL00090452
Refi PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 9
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON M Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section I; Connect the post office to the Post Office Network cree
(Post Office Log On) i
The first operation you will have to perform on the Horizon system is to connect the post office
to the Post Office Network. This process is more commonly called the Post Office Log On
(POLO) and must be carried out on the Gateway workstation first. The Horizon Field Support
Officer (HFSO) will be present to assist you in this procedure.
Tf you have a single Horizon system installed in the post office, that system is automatically the
Gateway workstation. Where more than one Horizon system is installed, the Gateway
workstation will be clearly identified on the screen (see the screenshot on page 8).
‘To perform the POLO procedure, you will need to use the Postmasters Memory Card (PMMC).
A similar procedure will then need to be performed on every other system in the post office
using the PMMC and the Personal Identification Number (PIN) produced during the initial
logon.
Note:
After a power failure the POLO process will need to be carried out again to re-establish
the link to the Network.
Postmasters Memory Card (PMMC).
Front of PMMC Reverse of PMMC
Note:
‘The Postmasters Memory Card (PMMC) must ALWAYShe stored in a secure location.
The PMMC is a smart card, and information relating to the POLO procedure is stored on the
gold-coloured patch on the front of the card.
Note:
‘Two PMMCs are issued with the Horizon system. One is used in the initialisation
procedure, the other is a spare in case the first is mislaid. If you have to use the spare
PMMC for any reason, refer to the Horizon System User Guide.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page?
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Connect the post office to the Post Office Network Pate: oar” °
(Post Office Log On), continued
Note:
The POLO procedure cannot be practised in Training Mode.
When the Horizon system is powered up for the first time, the POLO screen will be displayed.
TEWAY WORKSTATION will be indicated in the top left-hand corner of the screen.
The Replacement Roll-Out screen is
displayed on the Gateway workstation
in the post office.
The two options shown on screen are:
Replacement Used to reconnect the post office to the Post Office Network when the processor
has been replaced.
Roll-Out Used to connect the post office to the Post Office Network when the Horizon
system is first installed.
Note:
If you are reconnecting the post office to the Network after a power failure or if the
system had been switched off, refer to the Horizon System User Guide.
In the example below, the Horizon system has just been installed in the post office and you
wish to connect to the Post Office Network for the first time.
1. Touch the Roll-Out icon.
I A **WARNING*** message is
displayed. The system indicates that
any data on the PMMC will be
destroyed by continuing with the POLO.
procedure.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 8
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Connect the post office to the Post Office Network Pate,
(Post Office Log On), continued —
2. Touch the Confirm icon.
‘The screen message now prompts you
to insert the PMMC into the smart card
reader.
I The screen shows an animation of how
7 the card should be inserted into the
smart card reader.
‘You must insert the card into the smart card reader on the keyboard,
with the front of the card facing you and the broad arrow pointing
downwards.
3. dnsert the PMMC into the smart card reader.
When the Postmasters Memory Card
(PMMC) is inserted, the counter printer
XDN NGV SPC N7V X4B automatically prints a randomly
generated 1S-character code. This code
12:44 PM Tuesday, June 15, 1999 is called the PIN (Personal
Identification Number).
The PIN produced will look similar to
the example shown on the left.
Please keep this PIN record in a safe
place separate from your card.
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 9
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section {: Connect the post office to the Pest Office Network pe
(Post Office Log On), continued ”
Note:
DO NOT remove the PMMC until prompted to de so by the Horizon system.
The screen changes and prompts you to
check and confirm that the PEN has
printed correctly and that all
characters are legible.
Note:
If the characters are not legible, Touch the No icon and follow the on screen instructions.
4. Touch the YES icon.
The on screen display now prompts you
to enter the [S-character PIN (produced
earlier).
5. Type the 15-character PIN.
Cheek the PIN has been entered correctly before continuing.
Note:
if you make a mistake while entering the PIN, Press the BACKSPACE key and Re-type
the PIN. If you have moved into the next number bex, Press the SHIFT & TAB keys
simultaneously to move back to the previous box. [f the PINis entered incorrectly and the
PROCEED icon is touched, follow the on screen instructions.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 10
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Connect the post office to the Post Office Network seeds
(Post Office Log On), continued _
6. Touch the PROCEED icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
If for any reason you cannot carry out the POLO procedure, you should follow the on
screen instructions and contact the Horizon System Help Desk on__
A message appears on screen informing you that data is being written to the PMMC.
The connection has been successfully
made to the Network.
LEASE The screen displays a list of
instructions.
You must read and carry out the
4 instructions.
7. Remove the PMMC from the smart card reader.
8. Remove the PIN record from the counter printer.
9. Touch the PROCEED icon.
The Horizon system may take a short time to start.
Note:
Having logged onto the Gateway workstation, if there are other Horizon systems in the
post office, you MUST Insert the PMMC into all other counter positions in turn and £nter
the PIN previously produced by the Gateway workstation. This will initialise the other
Horizon systems in the post office. Refer to the Horizon System User Guide for this
procedure.
10. Carry out the POLO procedure for all other Horizon systems in the post office {refer to the
Horizon System User Guide for this procedure).
Note:
For security purposes, the PMMC, the PIN and the spare, unused, PMMC must be placed
in separate sealed envelopes signed across the seal by the manager. They must be stored
in separate, secure locations.
Well done!
You have practised connecting the Horizon system in the post office to the Post Office
Network.
© ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page HL
HORIZON SYSTEM
Office Administration
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/602
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
ic
WORKBOOK 9
Page 12
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration
HORIZON SYSTEM
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
Administration functions on the Horizon system. These include the initial set-up
Stock Units in the post office.
Note:
Administration tasks.
This section describes the actions and procedures required to carry out the various
You must have manager level access on the Horizon system to carry out these
of users and
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 13
HORIZON SYSTEM
Office Administration
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
@ICL
WORKBOOK 9
Page 14
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Usernames Date: 29107199
Issue: 2.0
Note:
The manager will be responsible for preparing the system to accept the post office staff as
users of the Horizon system after installation.
Usernames:
A username and a password are required for operational and security reasons. They work in
conjunction with each other so that the person to whom they belong can be recognised on the
Horizon system.
As the manager, you will be required personally to set up each member of your staff as a user
on the Horizon system. Usernames are used to control what users can do according to the
requirements of their job. This allows therm to use the system and make authorised changes.
Usernames must consist of six characters, which you make up in the following way:
~ The first initial of the user's first name.
~ The first two letters of their summame.
~ A three-digit number which will always be 001, unless there is an identical username in use
or created in the last 12 months.
For example: Martin Taylor would be: MTAOOL
Michael Taylor would be: =MTA002
Michelle Tait would be: MTA0O3
Note:
The manager is required te complete and keep a Horizon System User Registration Form
for each username currently in use and those deleted during the previous 12 months.
Note:
If a username is deleted on the Horizon system it can never be reused.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 15
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Refi PATH/43/002
Section 2: Passwords
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Passwords:
You must allocate each user a password, which they will use to log onto the Horizon system.
The first time they log onto the Horizon system, they will be required to change their password
immediately.
ALL users of the system must take responsibility for its security and passwords are
essential for that security.
Note:
‘There are a number ef rules to fellow when creating passwerds. A password must:
1, Be private, be selected by you personally and not be revealed to anyone else.
2. Be easy to remember.
Not be obvious or the same as your username: eg don’t use words like PASSWORD,
SECRET, car registration numbers or personal names.
4. Be changed immediately if allocated to you by someone else. For example when you are
first introduced to the system, or when you have forgotten your password and have been
issued a new one.
3. Contain a minimum of 6 characters and a maximum of 14 characters.
Contain a combination of letters and numbers eg POST1234.
7. Be changed immediately if you suspect it has been compromised.
a
Note:
Never write your password down and make sure you are not being watched while you are
changing it.
The system will automatically prompt you to change your password after the first successful
logon and every 30 days thereafter. You cannot re-use a password you have previously used in
the last 12 months on the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 16
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Add a new user Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
In the following example Kevin Fletcher will be created as a user on the Horizon system.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Administration menu is displayed.
There are two Administration icons:
Stock Units and Users.
‘The Migration icon is only available to
Horizon Field Support Officers
(HFSOs) and is therefore padlocked.
‘Sante
‘a ca
ree on a
or Press F2 on the keyboard.
} The User menu is displayed.
Note:
You must have manager level access to the Horizon system to add, modify or delete users.
3. Touch the Add User icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 17
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 2: Add a new user, continued
Office Administration
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Refi PATH/43402
Date: 19/07/99
Issue: 2.6
xe
4. Type KPLOOL
Check the username entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
oe
itt
¢
ate
4
<
6. Type FRED 1234.
The Password appears on the screen as a row of Xs. This is a security feature to prevent the
Password from being seen by anyone else.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The User Name screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to enter the
User Name.
‘To enter the name, you can either use
the keyboard or the Alphanumeric
Keypad.
In this example Kevin Fletcher will be
allocated the username KFLOO1.
The Password screen is displayed, The
system has recorded the User Name in
the box on the right-hand side.
The system prompts you fo enter a.
Password for user KFLOO}. When the
user logs on for the first time, the
system will force them to change the
Password allocated to them.
In this example the password will be
FRED 1234.
GAICL
WORKBOOK 9
Page 18
POLO0090452
PoLoo090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Add a new user, continued Dates 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Confirm Password screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
re-enter the allocated Password.
8. Type FRED1234.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
If the two Passwords entered are identical, the system will move onto the next step in the Add
User procedure. If the Passwords are not identical, the Error message ‘Password and confirmed
password do not match’ appears. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER and re-enter the
user's Password.
If the Passwords are identical, the First
Name screen is displayed. The system
prompts you to enter the user’s First
I
i
_ In this example the user’s First Name is
I Kevin.
I
I
I
/
I
i
10. Type KEVIN
Check the First Name entered is correct before continuing.
11. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 19
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2; Add a new user, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
The Last Name screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to enter the
user's Last Name.
Tn this example the user's Last Name is
Fletcher.
12. Type FLETCHER
‘Check the Last Name entered is correct before continuing.
13. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Initial Group screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to select the
access level you wish to give to the new
user.
There are three access levels available:
CLERK Can access all EPOSS functions and balance Stock Units on the Horizon
system.
SUPERVISORS Can access all EPOSS functions and complete an office balance. They
cannot carry out any system Administration changes eg add, modify or
delete users.
MANAGERS Can access all EPOSS functions and complete an office balance. They
can also complete system administration changes.
In this example you have decided to give the user Clerk access to the system.
14. Touch the CLERK icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
CICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 20
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Add a new user, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
foe) The User created screen is displayed.
ig ‘The system confirms that user KFLOOL
was successfully created.
=
15. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Modify User KFLOO1 screen is
displayed. There are two tabs at the top
of the box on the left-hand side of the
screen.
The User tab (number 1) is currently in
view. This indicates the Full Name of
the user you have created. The user
Options are also listed. The first option
indicates that the user must change their
password the next time they logon.
The Groups tab (number 2) will indicate
the user's access level group
To return to the Desktop menu:
16. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
You would now inform the new user what their username and password are.
They can then logon to the Horizon system at any time. During their first logon, the system
will automatically force them to change their password. However they will not be able to carry
out any Sales transactions UNTIL they have been attached to a Stock Unit. Refer to page 33
{attach a user to a Stock Unit).
Weil done!
You have added a new user te the Horizon system.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 21
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Refi PATH/43/002
Section 2: Change a password (Modify User) Pater Man
There may be occasions when a user's details need to be modified, eg when a user forgets their
password. In this case you can modify the user's details and allocate them a new password
which will allow them to access the Horizon system.
Note:
Any user with manager level access to the system can modify a user. If you have
forgotten your own password and there are no other users with manager level access to
the system, then you must contact the Horizon System Helpdesk on}
In this example, the user Kevin Fletcher has forgotten his password.
Note:
If you wish te change your own password, refer to Workbook 1 - Changing passwords.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Administration screen is displayed.
2. Touch the User icon, f9 or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The User menu is displayed.
In this example the user Kevin Fletcher
has forgotten his password. You
therefore need to allocate a new
password to him, so that he can
continue using the system.
ste
‘See eR,
ee on 2
Note:
3. Touch the Modify User icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
You must have manager level access on the Horizon system to add, modify or delete users.
Ich WORKBOOK 9
Page 22
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
ett . Th Date: 29/07/99
Section 2: Change a password (Medify User), continued Issue: 2.0
The User Name screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to select the
User Name to be modified.
To select a user, touch the icon that
corresponds to the user required. If the
User Name is not displayed, Touch the
black arrow icon on screen to reveal
another 5 alternative usernames.
in this example the required user
KFLOO1, is visible on the screen.
4, Touch the KFLOOI icon, or Press the appropriate F-key on the keyboard.
The Modify User KFLOO! screen is
displayed. The Full Name of the user
appears in the User box.
The Options for user KFLOOL are
listed.
The icons on the right-hand side of the screen can be used to modify the user characteristics:
Full Name (FL) ‘This icon is not used.
Groups (F2) Used to change a user’s access level, eg from Clerk to Manager.
Teller Id (F3) This icon is not used.
Options (F4} Used to access the user options.
Password (F5) Used to change the user's password,
In this example, the user has forgotten his password so a new one has to be allocated to him.
Note:
If user Kevin Fletcher tries three times to logon to the Horizon system and fails, the
Horizon system will automatically lock his account for a period of 15 minutes. To unlock
the account, Touch the Options icon and remove the green border by Touching the
Account is disabled icon. The user s password must also be changed.
6. Touch the Password icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
OWL WORKBOOK 9
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Change a password (Modify User), continued
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
The New Password screen is displayed.
« The system prompts you to enter a New
“ Password for the user,
I « The new password will overwrite the
i user’s existing password, so that the
user can logon to the Horizon system.
a
7. Type the new Password for the user (see page 16 of this Workbook).
The Confirm New Password screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
re-enter the New Password for the user.
ce
8. Re-Enter the new Password for the user.
If the two Passwords entered are identical, the system will move onto the next step in the
Modify User procedure. If the passwords are not identical, the Error message “Password and
confirmed password do not match’ appears. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER and
Re-Enter the new Password.
If the Passwords are identical, the Password changed screen is displayed. The system confirms
that the Password for user KPLOO! was successfully changed.
9. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Modify User screen. You would now inform the user what their new
password is. The system will automatically prompt the user to change their password the next
time they logon.
10. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Weil done!
You have changed a user s Password using the Modify User function on the Horizon sytem.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 24
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Delete a user Dates 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Note:
Deleting a user will erase all details of that user from the Horizon system. BEFORE the
user can be deleted, they MUST be attached to the Default Stock Unit, (see page 36 of this
Workbook).
As manager there may be occasions when you want to deny a current user of the system any
further access, eg if the employee no longer works in your post office. If this is the case, you
can delete the user. Remember if you delete a user, the details of that user will be erased on the
system and they will no longer be able to access the system at any level.
Note:
Hf the user is leaving your employment on a temporary basis, eg for a holiday or a short
leave of absence, you may wish to disable their account, using the Account is disabled
function on the Modify User, Options menu.
In the following example user KFLOOI has left your employment and you want to delete his
details from your system.
From the Desktop menu:
I. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Administration menu is displayed.
2. Touch the User icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The User menu is displayed.
3. Touch the Delete User icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
I The User Name screen is displayed.
_ The system prompts you to select the
_ User Name to be deleted.
4. Touch user KFLOOI, or Press the appropriate F-key on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 25
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Delete a user, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
‘I The Error message is displayed. The
system prompts you to confirm that you
are sure you want to delete user
KFLOOL.
I You can cancel the deletion at this point
I by Touching the Cancel red cross icon,
I or by Pressing F\ on the keyboard.
To confirm the user deletion:
5. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The User deleted screen is displayed.
The message confirms that user
KFLOOI was successfully deleted.
6. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The Horizon system returns to the Administration menu and the details for user Kevin Fletcher
have now been deleted from the system. You cannot re-use the username KFLOO1 once it is
deleted.
Note:
If you try to re-use the name KFLOOI, an Error message will inform you that itis Unable
to add user KFLOO1 .
To retum to the Desktop menu:
7. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have deleted a user from the Horizon system,
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 26
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Stock Unit introduction Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
STOCK UNIT TYPES:
The Horizon system supports two types of Stock Units:
~ Individual Stock Unit.
~ Shared Stock Unit.
Here is a description of both types of Stock Units and the working method they support:
INDIVIDUAL STOCK UNIT
Only one user at a time can be attached to an Individual Stock Unit. The single user therefore
has accountability for events occurring in that Stock Unit during the time(s) they are logged on.
The Individual Stock Unit therefore supports the Individual clerk accountability working
method. This ensures that only one user at a time is attached to any Individual Stock Unit.
Note:
This does not in itself ensure individual accountability, as another user can be attached to
this Stock Unit if the original user is detached, (which is done by attaching them to
another Stock Unit),
Note:
If you try to attach a user to an Individual Stock Unit already in use, the Horizon system
will refuse the attachment and inform the user that the stock unit is not shareable and
already has a user attached.
SHARED STOCK UNIT
A Shared Stock Unit supports several users, each of whom may be attached and logged on
simultaneously. When a Shared Stock Unit is balanced, each user of that Stock Unit may be
responsible for the declaration of the stock, stamps and cash representing their portion of the
Stock U The system will require a declaration identity number (this identifies the portion of
ihe Stock t) to be entered after each declaration of the stock, stamps and cash is made. The
declaration identity number is a two digit number allocated to the portion of the Stock Unit by
the manager. Each declaration made with a different identity number will then be added
together to form the total stock, stamps and cash held in the Shared Stock Unit. When the
balance report is ready to be produced, only one user can be logged onto and using the Shared
Stock Unit. All other users attached to the Stock Unit must logout of the Horizon system,
Note:
It may help to liken a Shared Stock Unit to a number of drawers from which users share
stock.
The Shared Stock Unit supports the Team working method. This allows several users to be
attached fo a Shared Stock Unit at the same time. The system does not allow Stock Unit
balancing whilst more than one user is logged on to the Stock Unit.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 27
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM ‘Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Stock unit intraduction, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Any user can be attached to any Shared Stock Unit in the post office, but a user can only be
attached to one Stock Unit at any time, whether it is Shared or Individual.
Note:
Workbook 10 describes the procedures for balancing Individual and Shared Stock Units.
All Stock Units used on the Horizon system are type-designated Individual or Shared Stock
Units, they may also be allocated the status of:
~ Default Stock Unit.
- Inactive Stock Unit.
- Correction Stock Unit.
Default Stock Unit
The Default Stock Unit is a system-maintained holding area. When a user is created on the
system, they are automatically attached to the Default Stock Unit.
Users attached to the Default Stock Unit are allowed to use a limited set of functions. They are
excluded from transacting Post Office business relating to stock and cash.
Note:
If a user attached to the Default Stock Unit is required to carry out Serve Customer
transactions, they should notify their manager at once.
Users attached to Individual Stock Units must be attached to another Stock Unit (usually the
Default) before a different user can be attached to their Individual Stock Unit.
The Default Stock Unit is a Shared Stock Unit.
Inactive Stock Unit
An Inactive Stock Unit is one where no transactions have been carried out during the current
Cash Accounting week. As these Stock Units have remained inactive since the last balance,
they can be rolled over using the previous week's balance figures.
The Inactive Stock Unit may be either Individual or Shared.
SCL WORKBOOK 9
Page 28
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Stock Unit introduction, continued pate
Correction Stock Unit
A Correction Stock Unit is created by the outlet manager to correct errors found in the Cash
Account when reconciling all dockets against the Trial Cash Account report. (The procedure is
undertaken only after all Stock Units have balanced), The user must firstly correct the errors
and then deal with the gain or loss discrepancies.
The Correction Stock Unit may be either Individual or Shared.
Note:
The outlet manager must make a written note of when and why a Correction Stock Unit is
created.
From time to time, it may be necessary to alter or modify the way Stock Units are set up and
used. These functions are available on the Horizon system and access to the functions is
dependent on the level of user access.
Note:
It is not possible to change a Stock Unit from Shared to Individual or vice versa ~ to do
this a new Stock Unit has to be created and the old one deleted. Certain rules have to be
observed before it is possible to delete a Stock Unit, eg it must hold no stock or cash and
be in a balanced state. For further information on Stock Unit deletion, refer to the
Horizon System User Guide.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 29
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Create a Stock Unit Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The following example covers the creation of a Stock Unit on the Horizon system.
Note:
You must have manager level access on the Horizon system to create, modify or delete
Stoek Units. If you do not have the required level of access there will be a padlock siga
superimposed on the icon.
A number of system rules apply to the creation of Stock Units:
1, Once created a Stock Unit must have a Stock Unit identifier consisting of a maximum of
three alphanumeric characters (with no spaces).
2. Stock Unit identifiers must be unique in the outlet. If a Stock Unit already exists with the
same identifier, the Horizon system will not allow you to proceed and will inform you that
a Stock Unit already exists with that identifier.
3. A Stock Unit must be type-designated Individual or Shared at the time of creation.
4. Once created, the Stock Unit type (Individual or Shared) cannot be modified.
Stock Unit creation starts from the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Stock Unit menu is displayed.
There are various options available for
the Administration of Stock Units and.
the users attached to them.
Sem ee
3. Touch the Create icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
®ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 30
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Create a Stock Unit, continued Dates ee
The Stock Unit ID screen is displayed.
The system prompts you to enter a.
Stock Unit identifier (ID) for the new
Stock Unit.
The identifier must be unique in the
outlet and contain no more than three
characters.
In this example the identifier CC will be
used for the new Stock Unit.
4. Type CC.
Check the identifier entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Stock Unit Type screen is
ses : displayed. The identifier CC has been
‘ accepted by the Horizon system, The
system prompts you to select the type of
Stock Unit required.
A description of the Stock Unit types
and their usage, is given on page 27 of
this Workbook.
In this example Stock Unit CC will be a
Shared Stock Unit.
6. Touch the Shared icon, A or Press F1 on the keyboard.
©IcL WORKBOOK 9
Page 31
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/A3/002
Section 2: Create a Stock Unit, continued eae
At this stage, if a Stock Unit with the identifier CC already exists, an Error message will inform
you that ‘Stock unit CC could not be created - Stock Unit CC already exists’. Acknowledge
the message by Touching the OK green tick icon (or by Pressing ENTER) and repeat the
Create Stock Unit procedure using a different and unique Stock Unit identifier.
In this example CC is a unique Stock Unit identifier.
‘The Created OK screen is displayed.
‘The system informs you that Stock Unit
CC has been successfully created and
the Stock Unit type is Shared.
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Stock Unit menu. To return to the Desktop menu:
8. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Note:
The Stock Unit created above is empty and there are no users attached to it. Before the
Stock Unit can be used to carry out transactions with a customer, you must first attach a
user to it, (see page 33 of this Workbook) and remit or transfer stock, stamps or cash into
it, (see Workbook 7).
Well done!
You have created a Stock Unit using the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 32
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Attach a user to a Stock Unit Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Before a Stock Unit can be used, a user must be attached to it. This will enable users to
perform transactions for customers or carry out general office Administration tasks.
Note:
If you attach a user to a Stock Unit, the user is automatically detached from the Stock
Unit they were previously using.
In the previous example Stock Unit CC was created, you will now attach a user to this Stock
Unit.
In the following example, the user RKEOOL will be attached to Stock Unit CC. If you do not
have a suitable user to attach, follow the procedure on page 17 of this Workbook to add a new
user to the system first.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Stock Unit menu is displayed.
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Select a Stock Unit to attach to
screen is displayed. The system.
prompts you to select the Stock Unit to
which user RKEOO! will be attached.
The screen lists all the Stock Units in use in your post office. If the required Stock Unit is not
visible, you can use the page selection green arrow icons on the right-hand side of the screen,
or the scroll arrows on the keyboard to view additional Stock Units. To select the required
Stock Unit, Touch the corresponding line on the screen to highlight the Stock Unit or use the
scroll arrow keys on the keyboard.
In this example the required Stock Unit is CC.
4. Touch the CC Stock Unit line, or Press the Down scroll arrow to highlight Stock Unit CC.
5. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press FI on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 33
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Attach a user te a Stock Unit, continued
Date: 29/97/99
Issue: 2.0
The Select a User to attach to Stock
Unit CC: screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to select the user
who will be attached to Stock Unit CC.
The sereen lists all the users available in your post office. If the required user is not visible,
you can use the green arrow icons on the right-hand side of the screen, or the scroll arrows on
the keyboard to view additional users. To select the user, Touch the corresponding line on the
screen to highlight the user or use the scroll arrow keys on the keyboard.
In this example the required user is RKEOOI (on Page 2 of 6).
6. Touch the Down green arrow icon, or Press PAGE DOWN on the keyboard to display the
page with the required user.
7. Touch the username RKEOOI, or Press the Down scroll arrow on the keyboard to select the
user required.
8. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
There will be a short delay of a few seconds. During this period the system is attaching the
selected user, to the required Stock Unit and updating the system records,
if the attachment is successful, the
Attached OK screen is displayed. The
message informs you that user RKEOOL
has been successfully attached to Stock
Unit CC.
Note:
If you try te attach a user to an Individual Stock Unit already in use the Horizon system
will refuse the attachment and inform you that the Stock Unit is not shareable.
@ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 34
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Attach a user to a Stock Unit, continued te
9. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The attachment is now complete and the Horizon system returns to the Stock Unit menu.
10. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Desktop menu.
Well done!
You have attached a user to a Stock Unit using the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 35
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Attach a user to the Default Stock Unit ee
In the last example a user was attached to a Shared Stock Unit. If you had wanted to attach the
user to an Individual Stock Unit, the procedure would only have been successful if no-one was
attached to the Stock Unit at the time. Since there is no Detach facility on the Horizon system,
anybody currently using an Individual Stock Unit must be re-attached elsewhere. This will
automatically detach the user from the original Stock Unit. The Default Stock Unit can be used
as a holding area.
teers attached to the Default Stock Unit cannot access the Transactions and Serve
Customer menus.
In the following example TSMOO1 will be attached to the Default Stock Unit.
From the Desktop menu:
1, Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
3. Touch the Attach icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Select a Stock Unit to attach to:
sereen is displayed. The system
prompts you to select the Stock Unit
that TSMOOI will be attached to.
‘The Stock Unit required is DEF
(Default).
4. Touch the DEF icon, or Press the Down scroll arrow to highlight Stock Unit DEP.
5. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
©1CL WORKBOOK 9
Page 36
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Attach a user to the Default Stock Unit, continued sane
The Select a User to attach to Stock
Unit DEF: screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to select the user
who will be attached to the Default
Stock Unit
The required user is TSMOO1.
6. Touch the Down green arrow icon, or Press PAGE DOWN on the keyboard.
7. Touch the username TSMOO01, or Press the Down scroll arrow on the keyboard to select the
user required.
8. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
There will be a short delay of a few seconds, During this period the system displays a rotating
egg timer. The system is ensuring the user is not currently logged on and using another
Horizon system in the post office.
After the short delay, the Attached OK
screen is displayed. The system
informs you that user TSMOOL has been
successfully attached to Stock Unit
DEF.
9. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The attachment is now complete. The Horizon system returns to the Stock Unit menu.
10. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Desktop menu.
Well done!
You have attached a user to the Default Stock Unit using the Horizon system,
Orch WORKBOOK 9
Page 37
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Delete a Stock Unit Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
From time to time, you may wish to delete a Stock Unit from the Horizon system.
A number of system rules apply to the deletion of Stock Units:
1. The user wishing to delete the Stock Unit must have manager level access on the Horizon
system.
2. All users must be detached from the Stock Unit to be deleted and attached to another Stock
Unit.
3. A Stock Unit cannot be deleted if transactions have been carried out against it in the current
Cash Account Period until it has been balanced and rolled over into the next CAP.
4, A Stock Unit cannot be deleted unless the total value of stock and cash in that Stock Unit is
zero. Stock can be transferred out (to other Stock Units in the office) or remitted out of the
office.
5. The Default Stock Unit cannot be deleted.
In the following example, Stock Unit CC will be deleted.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
i
Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard,
we
. Touch the Delete icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Select a Stock Unit to delete:
screen is displayed.
In this example the Stock Unit to be
deleted is CC.
4. Touch the Stock Unit CC line, or Press the Down scroll arrow to highlight Stock Unit CC.
8. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Horizon system will attempt to delete the Stock Unit. There will be a short delay of a
seconds. During this time the screen displays a rotating egg timer. If any of the system rules
applicable to deleting a Stock Unit has not been adhered to, the attempt will fail and an Error
message will be displayed. Follow the on screen instructions and attempt the Stock Unit
deletion again.
ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 38
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Delete a Stock Unit, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
If all the system rules have been
adhered to, the Deleted OK screen is
displayed.
_ The message indicates that the selected
I Stock Unit (CC) has been successfully
I deleted.
6. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Stock Unit deletion is now complete. The Horizon system returns to the Stock Unit menu.
To return to the main Desktop:
7. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have deleted a Stock Unit using the Horizon system.
©1CL WORKBOOK 9
Page 39
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: View Stock Unit functions Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Horizon system has three View functions available on the Stock Unit menu. These
functions only offer a view of Stock Units, users and attachments. No changes can be made by
accessing these functions.
To access the View functions of the Stock Unit menu:
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Stock Unit menu is displayed. There are three icons allowing you to View Stock Units,
Users and Attachments.
View Stck Units (F4) allows you to view all Stock Units currently in use on
the system. It informs you of the Stock Unit ID, the Type and the CAP/BP
(Cash Account Period/Balance Period) in which each Stock Unit is currently
working.
View Users (F5) displays a list of All Current Users of the system and
indicates which Stock Unit they are currently attached to.
View Attach (F6) displays a list of Stock Units currently in use. Selecting a
Stock Unit shows which users are attached to it.
When you have finished using the View functions of the Horizon system, Touch the Prev icon,
or Press ESC on the keyboard to return to the Stock Unit menu. If you want to return directly
to the Desktop, Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have used the View Stock. Unit functions on the Horizon system.
GICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Office Administration Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet I Workbook 9
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read this Workbook again. Some of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Nete:
If you are completing these exercises in the pest office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. If more than one system is installed in the post office, how do you recognise the Gateway
workstation from the POLO screen?
re
When the connection has been established through the Gateway workstation, and ail other
systerns have been initialised, which three items must you keep separate and secure?
3. Which three access levels can be granted to a user, by the manager?
4, You have two new members of staff Jim Dale and Jane Davidson. Create them as users of
the Horizon system, with Clerk level access,
5. dane Davidson has forgotten her password, Allocate a new password to her.
6 Create a Shared Stock Unit, XXX, and attach the users Jim Dale and Jane Davidson to it,
©ICL WORKBOOK 9
Page 41
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
'OL00090452
@ iCL
HORIZON
Balancing
using the
Horizon System
TRAINING
WORKBOOK 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
BALANCING USING THE
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Balancing: Objectives & Introduction 0.00000 ees 5
Stock Unit balancing overview 2.0.0... eee eee 7
Section 1
Horizon System Reports: Introduction © 000000000 ees in]
Counter Daily reports 0.0 ee eee eee 13
Reverse an existing transaction from a report... 0. eee
Counter Daily Cheques Listing report... eee
Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in a Shared Stock Unit .
Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCHD} in an Individual Stock Unit...
Office Daily reports ... 00.0...
End of Day precedure on the Horizor
Counter Weekly reports
Reports by user... 0. 6. oe eee
Activity Sheet 1 Workbook 10.000 ccc tenn eee 37
Section 2
Stock Unit Balancing: Introduction ................-...-... PE
Check Summaries 0000.00 renee eee
Process an error notice
Event Log All Events
Transaction Log search
Produce a Balance Snapshot for the Stock Unit .
Move Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) into the Suspense Account
Reclaim Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) from the Suspense Account .
Adjust Stock (individual Stock Unit)... 00000 eee
Declare Stamps (Individual Stock Unit) .......-....
Declare Cash (Individual Stock Unit) .
Re-declare Stamps or Cash on hand (Individual Stock Unit) .
Produce a Balance Report (Individual Stock Unit) and roll over the Stock Unit. .
ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 1
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
CICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 2
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
BALANCING USING THE
HORIZON SYSTEM
CONTENTS
Section 2 continued
Shared Stock Unit declarations 6.0.0.6 teres 76
Declare Stock (Shared Stock Unit) . . . 77
Shared Stock Unit new declaration .
Edit a Shared Stock Unit declaration
Shared Stock Unit adjust stock on hand :
Check Shared Stock Unit declarations .......
Produce a Balance Report (Shared Stock Unit) and roll over the Stock Unit... . .97
Activity Sheet 2 Workbook 10. ooo eee eee nee nee 101
Section 3
Cash Account Report: Introduction... 0.0.0.6. eee cee 103
Cash Account overview .
Roll over Inactive Stock Units into ‘the next Cas Account Period .
Produce an Office Snapshot report 2.2. ee ce ees 108
Office Weekly reports 0.6 eee eee
Produce the Cash Account report .
Create a Correction Stock Unit to hold errors in the Office Balance
@ ICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 3
HORIZON SYS)
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
CCL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 4
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
BALANCING USING THE
HORIZON SYSTEM
OBJECTIVES & INTRODUCTION
Objectives:
By the end of this Workbook you will be able to:
Produce Counter Daily, Counter Weekly and Office reports.
Complete the End of Day procedure.
Use the Transactions Log to find and reverse errors in the Stock Unit balance.
Post items to the Suspense Account
Declare Stock Unit holdings of Stock, Stamps and Cash.
Produce a Stock Unit Balance report.
Create a Correction Stock Unit to hold discrepancies in the office found after the SU
Balance has been completed.
8 Produce the Office Cash Account report.
Ne
mays
Introduction:
This Workbook describes the actions and procedures needed when balancing the Horizon
system. Whilst it is fair to say that no two outlets will necessarily carry out the balancing
procedure in exactly the same way, this Workbook will follow a logical progression that will
conclude with the Cash Account Report being produced for the outlet by the Horizon system.
The Workbook is divided into three sections. Section 1 describes the actions required to
complete Daily and Weekly reports and perform the client cut-offs as required. Section 2
describes the actions that must take place to achieve a Stock Unit balance. Section 3 describes
the actions that need to be carried out to produce the office Cash Account report.
Note:
if you are practising these procedures in the office, the Horizon system must be placed in
Training Mode by the manager.
it would not be practical to cover every possible balancing scenario which could be
encountered on the Horizon system. If you need further help, or if a specific example is not
covered in the balancing Workbook you should consult the Horizon System User Guide.
At the end of each Workbook there is an activity sheet which allows you to practise the
transactions covered in the Workbook. If you are not sure of the answer to a question, simply
re-read the relevant section of the Workbook and try again.
Note:
The Workboeks provide values against a number of products and services that are correct
at the time of going to press. This information is subject to change and you should refer
to the appropriate POCL transaction documentation for up to date price information.
@1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 5
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref; PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
OIL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 6
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Steck Unit balancing everview Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The production of the Cash Account, using the Horizon system, requires you to follow a series
of steps, starting with balancing each Stock Unit in the post office. Once all Stock Units are
balanced, then the Cash Account can be produced. A breakdown of the Stock Unit balance
procedure is shown on pages 8 & 9.
The Horizon system is capable of producing various reports. They can be accessed at any time,
although a number of them must be produced during the Stock Unit balance, otherwise the
process cannot be completed.
The types of Stock Unit used in your post office dictate some of the actions you perform to
carry out the balancing procedure. The declarations used for an Individual Stock Unit are
slightly different from those of a Shared Stock Unit.
This Workbook describes the basic balancing procedure and highlights the differences between
balancing a Shared and Individual Stock Unit, such that the Stock Unit can be rolled over into
the next CAP (Cash Account Period) or the next BP (Balance Period).
Note:
Cash Account Period (CAP) denotes which accounting week you are in during the
current financial year.
Balance Period (BP) can be a portion of a CAP. During periods of high turnover there
may be twe Balance Periods during a single Cash Account Period.
Reports are re-produced where required in this Workbook. They are used as examples to
describe the procedure. The types of reports required will be dependant on the business carried
out in your outlet during the last Cash Account Period,
From time to time there may be a discrepancy between the Horizon system derived figures and
the actual holdings of Stock, Stamps and Cash. This Workbook describes adjustments and the
functions available to help locate the source of the discrepancy. In a training environment it
would be impractical to cover every individual problem which may occur when balancing. If
further assistance is required to cure a balancing problem, you should refer to the Horizon
System User Guide and thereafter your POCL Regional Helpline.
Note:
The Horizon System Helpdesk should be used ONLY for Horizon system procedural
problems or equipment defects.
©iCL WORKBOOK 16
Page 7
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Stock Unit balancing overview, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Horizon system Individual Stock Unit balance procedure breakdown
Individual Stock Unit
Page 13
Produce the mandatory and non mandatory weekly reports
Page 31
Correct transactions if required by reversing any incorrect
transactions or entering any that have been missed
(refer to Workbook 7 - Reversals)
y
Record any Non Accounting Data & Parcel Traffic
required on one Stock Unit only
_ (refer to Workbook 7)
Print the Balance Snapshot
(check the report against your dockets and Stock)
Page 54
i
i
Adjust Stock if required
i Page G1
¥
Declare Stamps.
i Page 63
Y
Declare Cash
Page 67
View any discrepancies displayed by the system
Page 73
Check the Trial Balance Report
en I
Roll Stock Unit over into next CAP or BP as required
Note:
The procedure can be stopped at any time during the steps above, to investigate and
correct any errors that may arise.
ICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 8
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Steck Unit balancing overview, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Note:
Horizon system Shared Stock Unit balance process breakdown
Shared Stock Unit
Produce the mandatory and non mandatory daily reports
Page 13
IProduce the mandatory and non mandatory weekly reports
I Page 31
By user,
node or
Stock Unit
Correct transactions if required by reversing any incorrect
transactions or entering any that have been missed
Workbook 7 - Reversals
¥
Record any Non Accounting Data & Parcel Traffic
(required on one Stock Unit only)
Workbook 7
y
Print the Balance Snapshot
(check the report against your dockets and Stock)
Page 54
Page 77 or 94
¥
Declare Stock or Adjust Stock as necessary i
¥
Declare Stamps
. Page 81
y
Declare Cash
Page 85
larations made by
Dee
portion of the Stock
Unit or as a whole
¥
Check Declarations
Page 96
y
Print the Stock Unit Trial Balance Report
Page 97
il
Check the Trial Balance Report
Roll Stock Unit over into next CAP or BP as required
The procedure can be stopped at any time during the steps above, to investigate and
correct any errors that may arise.
@IcL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 9
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon Systens
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
eich
WORKBOOK 16
Page 10
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 1 - HORIZON SYSTEM REPORTS
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures required to produce system-generated reports.
There are a number of different types of reports that can be produced from the system, these are
for information only but they can help to locate an error or mistake carried out on the system.
The Counter Daily and Weekly reports are required to be produced to reconcile the work
carried out in the post office during the day or accounting week. The End of Day process is
also described.
@1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 11
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issues 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 12
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
: ily Date: 29/07/99
Section 1; Counter Daily reports Issue: 2.0
All Horizon system reports are accessed initially from the Reports icon on the Desktop menu.
The first type of report used in the balancing procedure is the Counter Daily report.
In the following example, you will produce a BT Bills report. The procedure for the production
of other Counter Daily reports, eg GiroBank and National Savings, is the same, with the
exception of the Cheques Listing report.
Note:
The nature of the business conducted throughout the day will determine which daily
reports are required.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon. or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Reports menu is displayed. There
is an icon for Counter Daily reports.
or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Counter Daily reports menu is
displayed. All the reports accessed
from this menu group can be printed on
the counter printer or previewed on the
sereen,
In this example you are going to
produce a BT Bills report.
om en mea
CICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 13
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 19/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 1: Counter Daily reports, continued
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
The Report tab gives information about
the Stock Unit and Cash Account
Period (CAP).
en aS
‘Paw
aera
To the right of the Report tab there are four icons which, if selected, will allow you to:
Print (F4) the report.
Preview (F8) the report on screen.
Perform the Cut Off (F12) for the client.
Complete (F16) the process, which will take you back to the Reports menu.
AwNe
In this example you require a printed report.
4. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Screen messages will be displayed for a few seconds informing you that the report is being
prepared and then printed. The report will be produced from the counter printer.
Name of Office i
I - FAD
Time, Date Feltham Post Office BAD & 123456 X patent
_ ~ Code
CAP, BP Mithmernnmetor! 17:35 15/06/1999 CAROL BP:OL SWAA
Stock Unit BT Bills
ISESSN CUSTOMER ACCOUNT VALUE,
LotR B22907853 1678
. . Lanse sa03esas4 ou Amount
Session No. & 143363 133456789 280.00 paid
- peertes 24027999 e210
Customer mae eyes? 4
account nos.
TOTALS YOLUME VALLE
BT bill Pyint 3 369.46 Total
SUMMARY TOTAL: 3s i a ie I
*** END OF REPORT *** Payments
ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page id
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Daily reports, continued Pate: Zoi
The report, reproduced overleaf, shows a number of BT Bill payments totalling £369.46 for
Stock Unit AA. The report details the Customer Account numbers and the total volume of
transactions carried out. You can take a report at any time.
At this point you would now reconcile the details on the report. If you find an error has
occurred as part of a transaction a Reversal can be carried out using the session number. An
example of this procedure is shown on page 17. (Workbook 7 also details how Reversals are
carried out).
If you wish to mark the end of the transactions for your cut off, you can do so by activating the
Cut-Off icon (F12).
Note:
Activating the cut off icon will reset the report totals to zero.
5. Touch the Cut-Off icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Cut off status screen is displayed
which informs you that the cut off for
the BT Bills report is being processed.
Note:
if the Cut-Off icon is activated before the report has been printed or previewed the Not
yet Output information message is displayed confirming that the report has yet to be
printed or previewed. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER and then print or
preview the report.
6. Touch the OK green tick icon, ot Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 1S
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizen System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Daily reports, continued pe
‘The Cut off status screen now indicates
that the BT Bills report has been cut off
successfully.
accordance with current POCL
= procedures.
I : z The report can now be dispatched in
I
I
I
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Produce Report screen. If no further actions are required:
8. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Counter Daily Reports menu.
Well dowe!
You have produced a BT Bills system report and performed the Cut-Off procedure for the
client using the Horizon system.
eich WORKBOOK 16
Page 16
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Reverse an existing transaction from a report Pate 20"
in the previous example, a BT Bills report was produced. If, during your reconciliation of the
details on the report, (prior to activating the client cut off), you notice that the details of one of
the original transactions had been entered incorrectly, then the error needs to be rectified before
the cut-off is carried out.
In this example the customer’s original BT bill payment should have been for £20.00 but
during the transaction on the Horizon system an extra zero was added to the amount. The BT
Bills report produced has indicated that the payment was entered as £200.00. If this transaction
is not corrected a discrepancy of £180.00 will occur when the Stock Unit is balanced. In this
case, the correction can be made by reversing the BT bill payment for £200.00 and completing
a second BT bill payment for the correct amount of £20.00.
The report itemises all the BT bill payments made since the last time the cut-off procedure was
carried out. Note that the Session Number for each transaction appears on the left-hand side of
the Customer Account number. This is required to reverse the original transaction, which is
classed as an Existing Reversal.
The Reversal will start from the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard
2. Touch the Reversals icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Transaction Reference screen is
displayed. The system prompts you to
enter the Transaction Reference number
(session number) obtained from the
report.
: i net 1 Ps
ms S201 The reference number is on the left of
an the Customer Account number and fs in
the format 1-23456.
I
l
4. Type the Transaction Reference (session) number from the report.
Check the reference number entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 17
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section t: Reverse an existing transaction from a report, continued p ace: 2
The Horizon system will now search for the original transaction. If it can be reversed the
Horizon system creates another transaction in the stack to the value of -£200.00 to offset the
original BT bill payment.
if the original transaction cannot be found the Horizon system will display a message to that
effect.
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Settlement screen is displayed. You should select the method of payment used by the
customer in the original transaction, ie Cash or Cheque. The Counter Daily Cheques Listing
report can be used to confirm whether a cheque fad been used as the original method of
payment, refer to page 19.
In this example the original transaction was completed with a Cash payment by the customer.
7. Touck the Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
A Reversal receipt is now produced on the counter printer, The original BT bill payment has
now been reversed.
Nete:
The customer s original BT Bill must now be completed for the correct amount of £20.00.
From the Serve Customer menu, you would now complete a BT Bill payment for £20.00 (cash)
using the Customer Account number obtained from the original BT Bills report.
On completion, the BT Bills report must then be reprinted and the client cut-off performed.
Refer to the procedure on page 13.
Well done!
You have completed an Existing Reversal from a counter report using the Horizon system.
@1CL WORKBOOK If)
Page 18
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Daily Cheques Listing report oe eee 2
The final Counter Daily report that should be produced is the Cheques Listing report. This is
the exception to the procedure described on page 13.
At the end of the day the Cheques Listing report should be printed (or previewed) and the
cheques reconciled against it. Once you are happy with the information on the report the
procedure can be completed. The cheques can then dispatched to the Data Processing Centre in
accordance with current POCL procedures. However, on the Horizon system, the dispatch of
the cheques is classed as a Remittance Out of the post office. Once the cheques have been
remitted out of the post office the Cheques Listing report can be produced again and the cut-off
applied at that point.
In the following example, the Cheques Listing report will be produced, the cheques remitted
out of the post office (dispatched), and the report taken a second time. Then the cut-off will be
activated.
From the Desktop menu.
1. Touch the Reports icon,
2. Touch the Counter Daily icon,
ounter
3. Touch the Cheques Listing icon, = or Press F10 on the keyboard.
After a short delay, the Produce Report screen is displayed. The report can be printed on the
counter printer or previewed on screen.
4. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Feltham Post Office FAD: 123
17-48 15/06/1999 CAP-01 BPOL S'
Cheques Listing
s
VOLUME
3
t
t
t
i
i
TOTAL 6
°° END GE REPORT +
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 19
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Daily Cheques Listing report, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Cheques Listing report, reproduced overleaf, shows a total of 6 cheques totalling £478.22,
accepted during the day. Once these cheques have been physically reconciled with the report,
they can be dispatched to the Data Processing Centre. This procedure must be completed as a
Remittance Out of the posi office on the Horizon system.
There is no requirement to activate the cut off at this point.
5. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Counter Daily Reports menu
6. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
7. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
8. Touch the Remittances icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
I The Remittances menu is displayed.
I There is an icon for Remitting
/ (dispatching) Cheques to the Data
Processing Centre.
i
I
i
or Press F7 on the keyboard.
The Rem Out Data Central menu is
displayed.
Only cheques can be remitted out of the
post office to the Data Processing
Centre,
WORKBOOK 10
Page 20
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Refs PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Daily Cheques Listing report, continued pate
10. Touch the Cheque icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the total
amount of cheques to be remitted out of
the post office.
In this example the total amount of
soem] I cheques is £478.22 (obtained from the
4I Cheques Listing report).
(oa)
LL. Type the amount of cheques to be remitted out of the office.
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
12. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The cheques now appear in the stack and the remitiance can be completed
13. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
A Remittance Out slip (Data Centre) receipt is produced on the counter printer. The slip must
be signed, datestamped and retained in the drawer. The cheques can now be dispatched in
accordance with current POCL procedures.
The Cheques Listing report can now be produced a second time and the cut off procedure
activated.
14. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
15. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
16. Touch the Counter Daily icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
17. Touch the Cheques Listing icon, or Press F10 on the keyboard.
18. Touch the Print icon, or Press P4 on the keyboard.
© Ich WORKBOOK 10
Page 21
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Refs PATH/43/002
Seetion 1: Counter Daily Cheques Listing report, continued pate
hain Post Office FAD: 123456X
8 15/06/1999 CAP:01 BP:OL SU:AA
Cheques Listing
VOLUME
«> END OP REPORT ***
The Cheques Listing report now includes the Remittance Out of the post office. Therefore the
total is now zero. The system report can now be cleared completely by activating the Cut-Off
icon which will reset the system report.
19. Touch the Cut-Off icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Cut off status information box is displayed.
20. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Cut off status information box is displayed informing you that the Report Cheques
cut off successfully.
21. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
The Horizon system returns to the Produce Report screen.
22. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Counter Daily reports menu.
Well done!
You have completed the Cheques Listing report procedure on the Horizon system.
ICL WORKBOOK i6
Page 22
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in a Pate nee
Shared Stock Unit i
At the end of the working day, you must declare the Over Night Cash Holding (ONCH). This
declaration can be made from the Counter Daily reports menu. ft is a mandatory report.
If the declaration is made in an Individual Stock Unit the system will compare the declaration
against the system-derived cash figure. If there is a difference then Horizon system will inform
you of the discrepancy.
If the declaration is made in a Shared Stock Unit, then the system will prompt you to enter the
declaration identity number for the portion of the Stock Unit that has been declared. The cash
can be declared as one total figure, or a series of declarations corresponding to the number of
portions into which the Stock Unit has been divided. The system will then add all declarations
together to arrive at the ONCH for the Shared Stock Unit.
In the following example you are attached to and using, a Shared Stock Unit. You have
counted the cash held in the whole of the Stock Unit and wish to declare the following figures:
Coins Ip £6.42
Coins 2p £12.26
Coins Sp £28.15
Coins 10p £85.10
Coins 20p £124.00
Coins 50p £150.50
Coins £1 £450.00
Coins £2 £340.00
Notes £5 £2560.00
Notes £10 £3520.00
Notes £20 £2120.00
Notes £50 £400.00
Notes £100 £200.00
Total £9996.43
From the Desktop menu.
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard,
The Reports menu is displayed. The ONCH declaration can be made from the Counter Daily
menu.
2. Touch the Counter Daily icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 23
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in a oe
Shared Stock Unit, continued —_
The Counter Daily Reports menu is
displayed. The Daily Cash Deel icon
ig! Yanai will allow you to declare the Over
ili] Gosnger Dany Night Cash Holding (ONCH).
a
in this example you are going to declare
the cash listed earlier.
3. Touch the Daily Cash Dec icon, 1b] or Press F9 on the keyboard.
‘The Enter Cash on Hand screen is displayed, allowing you to enter the cash held, by
denomination, The system is waiting for you to enter the cash held in Ip coinage. You can
enter the cash held, using the keyboard, or activating the Edit icon (F10 on the keyboard) will
allow you to enter the figures using the touch screen.
ACL WORKBOOK 10
Page 24
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in a sae
Shared Stock Unit, continued ao
4. Type the cash declarations listed on page 23, check the amount entered, and Press ENTER
on the keyboard after each entry. (The Edit icon can also be used: a number keypad appears on
screen allowing you to enter the cash declarations).
Note:
If an incorrect multiple is entered, eg £26.10 of 50p coins, the Horizon system will display
an error message. Acknowledge the message and re-enter the correct amount.
3. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Ft on the keyboard.
Because the declaration was made in a
Shared Stock Unit, the Identity screen is
displayed.
The system prompts you to enter a
declaration identity number.
In this example you will use the
2 itateteiettatatat declaration identity number 10.
es
Note:
If the Stock Unit has been divided into a number of portions, the same procedure can be
carried out by everyone having a portion of the Stock Unit s cash holding. However each
person making a declaration must de se using a different declaration identity number.
6. Type 10
Cheek the identity number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
I The Produce Report screen is displayed.
I At this point, a report can be produced
I on the counter printer or previewed on
/ screen
eer
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 25
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 1: Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in a
Shared Stock Unit, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref; PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
8. Touch the Print icon,
Feltham Post Office FAD:
18:07 1746/1999 CAP] BP:OL
‘Cash on Hand (Tuesday)
USER : CASOOL Declaration ID : 16
DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
6.42
12.26
28.15
P 124.00
85. {Ogee
I
Coins 50p 150.50
Coins £1 450.00
Coins £2 340.00
I Notes £5 2560.00
I Notes £10 3520.00
I Notes £20 2120.00
I Notes £50 400.00
Notes £100 200,00
TOTAL: 9996.43 ope
we" END OF REPORT ***
Note:
page 27.
Well done!
or Press P4 on the keyboard.
Details of the cash
declarations made
Total cash on
hand
9. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The procedure fer the ONCH declaration in an Individual Stock Unit is described on
You have completed the Overnight Cash Holding declaration in a Shared Stock Unit.
Oich
WORKBOOK 106
Page 26
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Declare the Overnight Cash Holding (ONCH) in an pate
Individual Stock Unit i
The procedure for declaring the ONCH in an Individual Stock Unit is similar to the process for
a Shared Stock Unit (described on pages 23 - 26 ).
In the following example the differences between the two procedures will be highlighted:
{. Carry out steps I - 5 on pages 23 - 25 using the cash figures on page 23.
The Confirm Loss/Gain sereen will be
displayed at this point IF a discrepancy
has been found between the cash
declaration entered and the
system-derived figure.
Touching the OK green tick icon,
Pressing ENTER will reveal the size of
the discrepancy.
Note:
if the cash declaration matched the system derived figure then the Produce Report screen
is displayed. Complete the ONCH declaration from step 9 on page 26.
2. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
The Discrepancies screen is displayed
indicating the size of the loss or gain.
Touching the Confirm green tick icon,
or Pressing F1 will acknowledge the
discrepancy.
If you are not happy to accept this as
the ONCH for your Stock Unit, you can
recount the cash on hand and redeclare
the ONCH. This will overwrite any
previous declarations.
3. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed and the Cash on Hand declaration can be printed again
on the counter printer or previewed on screen.
4. Carry out steps 8 - 9 on page 26.
Well done!
You have completed the Overnight Cash Holding declaration in an Individual Stock Unit.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 27
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 1: Office Daily reports
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
‘The final type of Daily report that can be used in the balancing procedure is the Office Daily
report. These reports are similar to the Counter Daily reports, but sammarise the total of all
transactions carried out in the post office.
Note:
These reports are office specific and for internal use only. They are not to be dispatched
to the client. They can be produced at any time, from ANY counter position in the pest
office. The report will be produced on the A4 report printer.
These reports are initially accessed from the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Reports menu is displayed and there is an icon for Office Daily reports.
or Press F2 on the keyboard.
I The Office Daily menu is displayed.
_ The reports available are similar to the
Counter Dailies.
report will be produced.
i
In the following example a BT Bills
3. Touch the BT Bills icon,
@IcL WORKBOOK 10
Page 28
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 1: Office Daily reports, continued
Balancing using the Horizon System
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
<
‘an cS
re a
4. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard,
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
The Report tab gives information about
the Office CAP.
In this example you are going to print
the client report.
Sereen messages will be displayed for a few seconds informing you that the report is being
prepared and then printed. The report will be produced from the Ad report printer.
Feltham Post Office
18:15 15/06/1999
su
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
(OFFICE TOTALS
PAD: 123456X
BT Bills Summaries
TIME
89219
10:01
1030
TL28
12:49
12:52
DATE.
15/06/99
15/06/09
15/06/99
15/06/99
15/06/99
15/06/99
15/06/99
+8" END OF REPORT "+
wt
OL.
Page 1
CAPLI
VALUE
1698
42.34
£200.00
62.10
48.24
£200.00-
£20.00
£189.46
Details of all
transactions
Lew CACHE OUt
(including the
Reversal)
‘Well done!
The screen display returns to the Produce Report screen.
S. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
You have produced an Office Daily BT Bills report using the Horizon system.
ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 29
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section
Balancing using the Horizon System
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
End of Day procedure on the Horizon system Issue: 2.6
Once all the required daily reports have been produced and the client cut-offs completed where
necessary, the End of Day procedure must be activated on the Horizon system. This will mark
the end of the business day.
‘This procedure starts from the Desktop menu:
1 or Press P6 on the keyboard.
I The End Of Day Activity List Reminder
screen is displayed. The system
I displays a list of reports and activites
I
/
i
that must be completed (if required) in
the post office at the end of the day.
You will notice that the screen
displayed is page I of 2.
. ‘ A oom
To view the second page of activiti
2. Touch the Down green arrow icon, or Press PAGE DOWN on the keyboard.
Page 2 of the End Of Day Activity List
Reminder screen is displayed.
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Desktop menu. If there are any activities that you have not yet
completed they should be carried out now.
Well done!
You have completed the End of Day procedure on the Horizon system.
©ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 30
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Weekly reports Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
The Counter Daily and Office Daily reports summarise on a daily basis, the work undertaken at
the counter and in the post office as a whole. However, there are other reports that need to be
produced at the end of the accounting week. These are called Counter Weekly and Office
Weekly Reports.
In the following example a P and A (Pensions and Allowances) Weekly report will be
produced.
Note:
Although the P & A is a weekly report, it can be produced at any time during the week.
‘The report can then be summarised and cut-off by the user whenever required.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Counter Weekly icon, or Press F5 on the keyboard,
The Counter Weekly menu is displayed.
A number of different reports can be
produced,
The nature of the business conducted in
your outlet during the accounting week
will determine which reports are
required,
in this example a P & A Report is
required.
3. Touch the P and A Weekly icon, or Press F\ on the keyboard.
4
end A Weekly
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 3t
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 1: Counter Weekly reports, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/67/99
fssues 2.0
4. Touch the Print icon,
The Produce Report screen is displayed
for the P and A report.
The screen is similar to the Produce
Report screens for the Counter and
Office Daily reports. The report can be
previewed on screen or printed on the
counter prinier,
To print the report:
Screen messages will be displayed for a few seconds informing you that the report is being
prepared and then printed. The report will be produced from the counter printer and
summarises all Pensions and Allowances paid during the current Cash Account Period or since
the report was last cut-off.
Feltham Post Office:
V7TA5 15/06/1907
iP and A
Allowances
PRA 5 chd ben
PRICE VOLIIME
22.50 12
23
4
Total P&A 13 ret pens
Pensions
P&A 13 ret pens
PRICE VOLUME
36.50 2
108.00 3
Total PRA 13 ret pens
TOTALS: Vohame
Allowances
Child Benefit 39
Sub Total: 39
Pensions
PRA IS 5
Sub Total: 5
SUMMARY TOTAL: 44
CAP:LE BP:O1
FAD: 123456
SUAA
VALUE
270.00
PS. Details of all
OBCS foil
encashments.
“
397.00
397.06
Summary of
ALL Pensions
1432.50 <—4
and Allowances
*** END OF REPORT *** paid
OIL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 32
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Counter Weekly reports, continued Pate ees
The report reproduced overleaf shows an example of the Pensions and Allowances Weekly
Report. It details each Pension or Allowance Group and summarises by volume and total, the
total number of all the benefits paid. Once you have reconciled the report with the foils the
cut-off can be applied to reset the system total.
You can produce a report at any time during the accounting week to check the total of benefits
paid. It is also possible to carry out the reconciliation of the P&A transactions and apply the
cut-off at the end of each day. However the foils and accompanying report must be dispatched
only once, (at the end of the accounting week) in accordance with current POCL procedures.
To apply the cut-off:
5. Touch the Cut-Off icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
The Cut off information screen is displayed which informs you that the system is processing
the cut off.
6. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Cut off information screen is displayed again informing you that the Report P & A cut off
was successful.
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
8. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Counter Weekly menu.
Well done!
You have produced a system report for Pension and Allowance Weekly Summary and
performed the cut-off procedure using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 33
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
. . : Date: 29/07/99
Section 1: Reports by user Issue: 2.0
The reports produced so far have all been for a counter position or the post office as a whole. It
is also possible to produce reports by user, so that a user, who may have served at numerous
counter positions in the office, can obtain an accurate report of their work.
Note:
The By User reports can only be produced once any user in the post office has printed or
previewed the report and activated the cut-off from the Counter Daily or Counter Weekly
reports menu,
In the following example, an APS Transactions report will be produced for the user CASO01.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
ao,
I The Reports menu is displayed. There
I is an icon for reports By User.
or Press P9 on the keyboard.
I The By User menu is displayed,
_ showing the different reports available.
aye
in this example you are going to
produce an APS Transactions report.
3. Touch the APS Transacin icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
HAPS Transactn
OIL WORKBOOK 10
Page 34
POLO0090452
PoLoo090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 1: Reports by user, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
I The Select a User screen is displayed.
_ Select the user that the report will refer
to.
In this example the user required is
CASO01.
4. Select the User by touching the line to highlight the User in yellow.
5. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press F] on the keyboard.
‘The Produce Report screen is displayed.
Screen messages will be displayed for a few seconds informing you that the report is being
prepared and then printed. The report will be produced from the counter printer and will be in
the same format as the Counter Daily report shown on page 14.
7. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have produced a By User APS Transaction List report using the Horizon system.
®ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 35
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 36
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet I Workbook 16
Note:
in Training Mode.
1, Produce a Counter Daily Giro Deposits report.
2, Declare the following ONCH:
Coins Ip
Coins 2p
Coins Sp
Coins 10p
Coins 20p
Coins 50p
Coins £1
Coins £2
Notes £5
Notes £10
Notes £20
Notes £50
Notes £100
3. Produce an Office Daily NS Deposits report.
4. Produce a Counter Weekly Green Giro report.
If there are any questions you are unable to answer, read Workbook 10 Section I again. All the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
If you are completing these exercises in the post office, ensure that the Horizon system is
£15.00
£20.00
£35.00
£80.00
£150.00
£200.00
£450.00
£350.00
£2500.00
£3200.00
£2800.00
£100.00
£100.00
S$. Produce a BT Bills report for any user (other than yourself),
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 37
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 38
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 2 - STOCK UNIT BALANCING
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures required to balance a Stock Unit. The
Balance procedure for both Individual and Shared Stock Units is described on pages 8 and 9.
It is worth pointing out that no two Stock Units will necessarily require the same preparation.
work.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 39
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
SiC.
WORKBOOK 16
Page 46
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Check Summaries Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Once the Counter and Office Daily and Weekly reports have been taken, it is always
worthwhile carrying out the Check Summaries procedure. The system will check to ensure that
all required system reports have been carried out and a message displayed indicating that:
- There are no Outstanding Summaries (reports) that will stop the Stock Unit balance procedure.
or
~ There are Summaries (reports) still to be produced. It will also indicate whether the reports
are mandatory ie they MUST be taken before the Stock Unit can be balanced.
This procedure starts from the Desktop menu:
l. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press P4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There are various icons that will
directly affect the stock, including a
Summaries icon.
2. Touch the Summaries icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system will now check whether if all the Summaries (reports) have been pro-
duced, and provide a screen message as already indicated above.
The examples on the next page show the two likely messages.
©1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 41
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Check Summaries, continued Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
found that there are no outstanding
summaries that need to be produced,
The OK green tick icon at the bottom of
screen will allow you to return to
ee Stock Balancing menu,
=
=
_ I In this example the Horizon system has
I
I
I
i
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
If the Horizon system finds that there
are outstanding summaries that need to
be produced, the screen will indicate
which reports have still to be produced.
Note:
The system will indicate only if there
are any mandatory reports to be
produced.
4. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have completed the Check Summaries procedure using the Horizen system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 42
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Process an error notice Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Occasionally an error notice may be generated by a client or by POCL. The post office will be
notified of it and the actions to be taken to correct the error. The Horizon system allows you to
process error notices from the Housekeeping menu. All error notices require a value entry.
Note:
The processing of an error notice will affect the Daily report for some products eg NS.
Error notices must be processed as soon as they are received.
In the following example, an error notice has been received from National Savings. The
notification informs the outlet manager that a National Savings Error Notice Deposit must be
recorded for £50.00.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Transactions menu is displayed,
showing an icon for Housekeeping.
or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The House Keeping menu is displayed.
There are various icons for the different
types of error notices you may receive.
There are two ivons for National
Savings error notices:
NS E/N dep and NS E/N w/dew!.
©ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 43
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
s ih
Section 2: Process an error notice, continued ote Ot
3. Touch the NS E/N dep icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Amount screen is displayed. Enter
the amount from the error notice.
In this example the amount is £50.00.
Ss)
60
iL
t
4. Type £50.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The error notice is now registered in the stack,
6. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
When the Finish icon is activated, the system creates a balancing transaction against Cash
(this will therefore inflate or deflate the Cash on hand by the amount of the error notice).
To return to the Desktop menu:
7. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Well Done!
You have processed a National Savings Deposit Error Notice.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 44
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Event Log All Events Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
From time to time you may need to access the Horizon system Event Logs to find out
additional information about something that has been carried out on the system at an earlier
date or time.
In the following example you will produce an Event Log report that lists ALL events that have
happened today.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Event Log icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
faa S I The Event Log menu is displayed.
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Date screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to enter the start
date of the events required. The date
must be entered in the format
dd/min/yy.
8 g : in this example, today’s date is the
16/06/99,
la!
©ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 45
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
. . P. + Date: 29/7/99
Section 2: Event Log Ail Events, continued
Issue: 2.0
4. Type 16/06/99
Check the date entered is correct before continuing.
5. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Date screen is again displayed.
The system is now prompting you to
I I enter the end date of the event log
i : I search,
I In this example the end date will also be
<8 iS) I today. The report will therefore list all
R events that have happened today.
For this example today’s date is the
= 16/06/99.
6. Type 16/06/99
Check the date entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed
offering you the choice of previewing
the report on screen or printing the
report on the counter printer,
ines
toms CEE
Rua
coe
8. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard,
‘The report will now be printed on the counter printer. An example of the information
contained in the report is shown overleaf.
ich WORKBOOK 10
Page 46
asa
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Event Leg All Events, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
Well done!
Horizon system.
Feitham Post Office
19:32 16/06/1999 CAPE1 BPO! fs AA
Event Log: All Events
SU USER CAP BP NODE
DATE & TIME EVENT TITLE
EVENT DESCRIPTION
AA CASOOL LL OL OF
16KI6/97 08:55 Logon completed
User CAS001 logged on
AA CASOOL 11 01 Ol
16/06/97 13:08 Logout completed
User CASOOI logged off
AA CASO01 ti Of OL
16/06/97 13:55 Logon completed
User CASOOI logged on
AA CASOO1 Ob OL
16/06/9 Report Printed
Report BT Bill Summaries
ib OL th
16/06/97 UP4L Report Printed
Report APS Transactions
¥8* END OF REPORT #**
The screen will now return to the
9. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
ent Log menu.
You have produced an Event Log showing all events that have happened today on the
ICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 47
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transaction Log search
Date: 2947/99
issue: 2.0
Occasionally a transaction may be carried out in the post office and at a later time, you need to
jocate the original transaction. A log of each transaction is kept on the Horizon system for the
the previous 30 days plus the current accounting week. This log is obviously very large, so
options can be set to reduce the size of the report.
In the following example, you wish to search the Transaction Log to find a BT Bill payment
carried out by the user CASOOL, using Stock Unit AA on the 16/06/97 for approximately. £45.00.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touck the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
sy
2.
or Press F3 on the keyboard.
I The Criteria: Transaction Log screen is
/ displayed. The icons here can be used
/ to set criteria to help reduce the size of
I the Transaction Log search.
in this example the following criteria will be set
Stock Unit AA
User CASOOI
Date From Today (16/06/97)
Date To Today (16/06/97)
Value From £40.00 receipt (minimum value of the original transaction)
Value To £50.00 receipt (maximum value of the original transaction)
4. Touch the Stock Unit icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
GiChL WORKBOOK 16
Page 48
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System. Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transaction Log search, continued Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Select a Stock Unit screen is
displayed, allowing you to select the
Stock Unit in which the original
transaction took place.
5. Select Stock Unit AA.
6. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Criteria: Transaction Log screen. Note the Stock Unit icon now has a
green border and a no entry sign, indicating that the Stock Unit has been set and cannot be
changed for this search.
7. Touch the User icon, § 22344 or Press F3 on the keyboard.
a ee I The Select a User sereen is displayed,
aed I . .
ered ih I allowing you to select the user who
I
I
ee ce
I completed the original transaction.
:
Se
8. Select the user CASOO1.
9. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
‘The system returns to the Criteria: Transaction Log screen. The User icon also has a green
border.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 49
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Transaction Log search, continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Refs PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.6
10. Touck the Date From icon, =I or Press F4 on the keyboard.
11. Type the start date of the search.
Check the date entered is correct before continuing.
12. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Criteria: Transaction Log screen.
13. Touch the Date To icon, or Press FS on the keyboard.
The Daie screen is displayed, allowing you to set the finish date for the search.
14. Type the finish date of the search.
Check the date entered is correct before continuing
15, Toueh the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Criteria: Transaction Log screen.
16. Touch the Value From icon,
Wolue Flom
The Date screen is displayed, allowing
you to set the start date of the search.
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 50
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transaction Log search, continued Pate
The Value From screen is displayed.
: ‘You can now set the minimum value of
“ the original transaction.
Ore OO -
17. Type £40.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
TER on the keyboard.
The Transaction Type screen is
displayed.
18. Touch the green tick icon, or Press E}
The systern prompis you to select what
type of transaction was originally
carried out ie was it a receipt (payment
from the custorner) or a payment (to the
customer)?
In this example the transaction was a
receipt.
19. Touch the Receipt icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The system returns to the Criteria: Transaction Log screen.
20. Touch the Value To icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
21. Type £50.00
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
22. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
23. Touch the Receipt icon, or Press F) on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page $1
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Transaction Log search, continued eae
The system returns to the Criteria Transaction Log screen. All the criteria required have now
been entered. If you want to check the criteria set, activate the Display icon.
Pee
24. Touch the Display icon, or Press F1S on the keyboard.
The Criteria screen is displayed,
showing the criteria set for the
transaction log search,
25. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Criteria: Transaction Log screen reappears. To start the search:
26. Touch the Continue green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
The resuits of the search can either be
previewed on screen, or printed on the
counter printer.
NP ec ra
{
27. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The search results are now printed. An example of the Transaction Log report is shown
overleaf.
@1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 52
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Transaction Log search, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
User Name,
Date and time
carried out.
payment carried
out from the
Serve Customer
(SC) mena.
Well done!
LPAMSACTION Wj emma
BT bill mpenemeennnnaeh
TOTALS: COUNT VOLUME VALUE
4 182.49
*** END OF REPORT ***
The report identifies all transactions carried out in Stock Unit AA by CASOO1 today (16th June
1999), where the amount paid by the customer was between £40.00 and £30.00. In this
example, four payments have matched the criteria set, one of which was 4 BT Bill payment.
28. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press P16 on the keyboard.
You have searched the Transaction Log, by entering certain criteria, to find a transaction
carried out earlier on the Horizon system.
CASOOL 1-14681 an out a Reversal
16/06/99 14:51
SC BT bill pymt i S71 _ines Transaction
amount,
Issue: 2.0
Feltham Post Office FAD:
18:43 [6/6/1999 CAP:LT BRL 3 tA.
‘Transaction Log
USER TRANS REF = SU CAP BP
DATE TIME
MODE PRODUCT VOLUME VALUE
CASOO] 1-14613 AA ib OF
16/06/99 09:37
SC Giro esh dep i 4478
CASOOL 1-14636 AA i OF
16/06/99 10:47
SC Postage simp i 45.00
CASOOL 1-14657 AA i) 01
16/06/99 12:07
SC Giro esh dep 1 50,00 Transaction
Reference Number
required to carry
OIL
WORKBOOK 10
Page $3
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Refs PATH43002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Snapshot for the Stock Unit Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The first step in the balance process is the production of the Daily and Weekly reports. Once
these have been produced then a Balance Snapshot can be printed and used to check against
your vouchers and dockets. It can also be used as a guide when you make a physical check of
al) the stock held in the Stock Unit. A Balance Snapshot can be produced at ANY time during
the accounting week.
From the Desktop menu:
\. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There is an icon for a Balance
Snapshot.
ee Bw
nN
or Press F5 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
sf
‘Bieuls 2
(eae CER
. (Senay
bs « : ap 9 aS
3. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
een WORKBOOK 10
Page 84
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Preduce a Balance Snapshot for the Stock Unit, continued Pate:
A screen message will be displayed, showing the report is being produced and then printed.
The Balance Snapshot is printed on the counter printer. The report below shows the start of a
typical Balance Snapshot report.
Peitham Post Office FAD: 123456X)
18:21 16/06/1999 CAP:11 BP:OL SU:AA
Balance Snapshot 7
A Snapshot view of
***Discrepancies in this Account*** z is -
*Discrepancy OVE! 0.00 any Diserepancies
“Discrepancy UNDER, Over or Under
{accepted the
“Total discrepancy
* previous week)
Seeioenononeneriones
Value Stock & MOP Volume Value
Cash 27040.52 Balance
rest Esa ts beeen Snapshot Volume
Mono TV Fee 470 14335.00 and Value details
Mono 14335.00
Colour TV Fee 468 — 42822.00
‘olour 42822.00
TV FEE S71S7.00
BBC TV Stump £1 120 120.00
BBC TV Licence Sunp 120.00
Phil Other 25.76
First Day Cov 10 270
Pres Pack 35.00
RMS Card 10 2.30
PHILA? TEL iC ITEMS: 65.76
ist Class Stamp 1438 402.64
ete ete ete
The above Balance Snapshot represents approximately 20% of a typical report. The type of
business undertaken and the size of your outlet will have a large bearing on the stock held and
therefore the size of the report.
4. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Horizon system returns to the Stock Balancing menu.
Well done!
You have produced a Balance Snapshot report for your Stock Unit.
© ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page $5
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Move Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) into the pate
Suspense Account
The Suspense Account has been created to account for stock or cash that cannot be allocated to
transactions of specific products or stock whose value cannot be entered into accounts proper
until a later date, These items are more commonly referred to as Unclaimed Payments or
Uncharged Receipts and appear in Tables 2, 2A and 3 on the Cash Account report.
To enable the Stock Unit to balance, these items must be moved into the Suspense Account to
allow the items to be carried forward between CAPs. On completion of the Stock Unit roll
over, the items must be reclaimed from the Suspense Account, as this process is not carried out
automatically. If the items are not cleared before the next rollover, the procedure must be
repeated,
In the following example a voucher for £1.04 was accepted as a method of payment. If the
vouchers are still present when the Stock Unit is balanced, they must be moved into the
Suspense Account to allow the Stock Unit to balance.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Housekeeping icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The House Keeping menu is displayed.
There is an icon for Adjustments.
ecneacs
or Press F16 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 56
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Move Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) into the Pate: 27 iM
Suspense Account, continued i
The Adjustments menu is displayed.
There are various icons that allow you
to make adjustments to the Stock Unit.
Voucher to U/P is used to move
vouchers into the Suspense Account.
Rdm voucher is used to reclaim the
vouchers from the Suspense Account.
‘Rem STR
Sib
ae oe
Press F13 on the keyboard.
cher to U/P.
cobain. I ~~] The Amount screen is displayed. You
a Ene Se SS
treed cued es I can now enter the amount of vouchers
SUP
to be posted to the Suspense Account.
0-60 Oty isin
eS
rs
5. Type £1.04
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The vouchers are now placed in the stack. If there are any other items that need to moved into
the Suspense Account, the same procedure should be followed.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
When the Finish icon is activated, the system creates a balancing transaction against Cash
(this will therefore inflate or deflate the Cash on hand by the amount of the Voucher).
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page $7
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Move Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) inte the Dates on
Suspense Account, continued
8. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Note:
Once the vouchers have been moved into the Suspense Account, you MUSTcarry out a
steck adjustment to set the value of vouchers held in the Stock Unit to zero. This adjust
ment will automatically record a balancing transaction against Cash which will offset the
Cash adjustment recorded when the Finish icon was activated after the Voucher was
moved into the Suspense Account.
Well done!
You have successfully moved vouchers into the Suspense Account.
OIL WORKBOOK 10
Page 58
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/S3/002
Section 2: Reclaim Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) from the ote a
Suspense Account .
Once the Stock Unit has rolled over into the next CAP, any items that were moved into the
Suspense Account, ie vouchers and unpaid (R/D) cheques, MUST be reclaimed in the next
CAP and replaced in their original Stock Unit.
The following example shows the procedure for reclaiming the £1.04 of Vouchers (Unclaimed
Payments) moved into the Suspense Account in the last example.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Housekeeping icon, or Press F13 on the keyboard.
The House Keeping menu is displayed.
There are various icons for registering
error notices as well as an icon for
Adjustments.
eon
Press F16 on the keyboard.
The Adjustments menu is displayed.
‘There are various icons that allow you
to make adjustments to the Stock Unit.
Voucher to U/P is used to move
vouchers into the Suspense Account.
Rdm voucher is used to reclaim the
vouchers from the Suspense Account.
@1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 59
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/062
Section 2: Reclaim Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) from the ote
Suspense Account, continued
or Press F11 on the keyboard,
‘The Amount screen is displayed. You
can now enter the total amount of the
vouchers to be reclaimed from the
1 = Suspense Account.
5. Type £1.04
Check the amount entered is correct before continuing.
6. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The vouchers are now placed in the stack. If there were any other items to reclaim from the
Suspense Account, the same procedure would be followed.
7. Touch the Finish icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
Note:
When the Finish icon is activated, the system creates a balancing transaction against Cash
(this will therefore inflate or deflate the Cash on hand by the amount of the Voucher).
To return to the Desktop menu.
8. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
Note:
Once the vouchers have been reclaimed from the Suspense Account, you MUST carry out
a stock adjustment (to set the value of vouchers held in the Stock Unit to the value
reclaimed from the Suspense Account) or some other transaction (eg a Remittance Out) to
account for the value of the Vouchers.
Well done!
You have reclaimed the Vouchers (or Unclaimed Payments) from the Suspense Account.
GICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 60
POLO0090452
POLO00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Adjust Stock (Individual Stock Unit) Pate: 0
The first step in the balance process is to adjust the stock on hand. A physical check of all
stock held (including First and Second Class stamps) must be carried out and compared to the
iem-derived figures, this can be done using the Balance Snapshot printed earlier. Any
discrepancies found can then be amended on the Balance Snapshot and the stock can be
adjusted on the Horizon system to reflect the actual stock held.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There are two icons for the declaration
of Stamps and Cash that can be used
with Individual Stock Units.
The stock held in an Individual Stock
Unit must be adjusted to reflect the
actual quantities held.
2. Touch the Adjust Stock icon, Press F4 on the keyboard.
The system will now display a message
saying that a Stock on Hand list is being
prepared.
After a short delay, the Adjust Stock on
Hand menu is displayed. The
quantity/totals of each stock item can
now be compared with the system
figures and adjusted (if required) to
reflect the actual stock held.
ech WORKBOOK 10
Page 61
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Adjust Stock (Individual Stock Unit), continued Pate ao
3. Compare the stock on hand against the system and Adjust as necessary.
In the example shown below, the stock check has revealed that you are holding a quantity of
4845 x First Class stamps. The Horizon sys is indicating that you should have 4846 x Ist
class stamps. Therefore you must adjust the quantity on the system to reflect the actual
quantity held.
The Adjust Stock on Hand screen is
displayed.
To adjust the quantity of First Class
stamps. you must highlight the First
Class stamps line and then enter the
actual quantity held.
eee EOSIN
4. Type the actual quantity of First Class stamps held.
Cheek the quantity held is correct before continuing.
5. Press ENTER on the keyboard, or Touch the green tick icon (if using the touchpad).
The system will automatically move to the next stock item on the list. On completion of all
stock adjustments:
6. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Note:
When the Finish icon is activated, the system records a balancing transaction against
Cash for each item adjusted.
‘The system will now commit the list and then return to the Stock Balancing menu.
Well done!
You have adjusted the stock ou hand in your Individual Stock Unit.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 62
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Seetion 2: Declare Stamps (Individual Stock Unit) sea aaMLAeS
With the stock now adjusted to reflect the actual stock held, the two declarations for stamps and
cash can be made. The first of these will be the declaration of all postage stamps (by volume),
with the exception of First and Second Class stamps (these are classed as stock and were
adjusted as part of the stock, refer to page 61). At this point you would count the quantity of
all the postage stamps held in the Stock Unit. Once you have completed this, you can declare
the stamps on the Horizon system.
Note:
The Cash declaration MUST be made last, as the adjustment of stock and the declaration
of stamps will automatically adjust the cash figure.
In the following example you have counted the volume of stamps held in the Stock Unit and
wish to declare the following total:
Ip stamps 179 39p stamps 42
2p stamps 185 43p stamps HIS
4p stamps 109 44p stamps 95
5p stamps 110 SOp stamps 86
6p stamps 88 63p stamps wid
Tp stamps 74 64 p stamps S9
10p stamps 93 £1.00 stamps oF
20p stamps 112 £1.50 stamps 82
30p stamps i] £2.00 stamps 103
31p stamps 64 £3.00 stamps 84
37p stamps 72 £5.00 stamps 73
38p stamps 58
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There are two icons for the declaration
of Stamps and Cash that can be used.
with Individual Stock Units.
2. Touch the Decl Stamp icon, I or Press F2 on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 63
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Individual Stock Unit), continued pte
The Declare Stamps on Hand screen is
displayed. The volume (quantity) of
each value stamp held can now be
declared.
3. Type in the volume (quantity) of Ip stamps held.
Check the quantity entered is correct before continuing.
4. Press ENTER on the keyboard, or Touch the green tick icon (if you are using the touchpad).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all stamps held in the Stock Unit, listed on page 63.
6. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press FI on the keyboard.
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen will be
displayed if the total value of all
postage stamps (excluding First and
Second Class) disagrees with the system
derived total. The message displayed
indicates that a discrepancy exists.
Continuing will present a list of
discrepancies for confirmation.
Note:
If there is no loss or gain associated with the declaration, the system goes to the Produce
Report screen. Follow the instructions from step 9.
Nete:
Any discrepancy identified during this process will result in a loss or gain transaction
being recorded by the system. The total of all the loss and gain transactions will be shown
separately at the top of the Trial and Final Balance reports. The NET value of the
discrepancies will be shown in the Payments Table of the Cash Account Report.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 64
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Individual Stock Unit), continued ote a
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Discrepancies screen will indicate
the size of the discrepancy.
At this stage you must acknowledge the
discrepancy by Touching the Confirm
green tick icon.
Note:
Tf you are not happy to accept the
discrepancy the process must be
completed. You can then investigate
the cause of the discrepancy and
re-declare the stamps held.
8. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
It is always worth printing a report so
that it can be used to help investigate
I
i
i possible discrepancies.
‘oun NE
Since
ara ee
9. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The report will now be produced from the counter printer and will look similar to the one
overleaf.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 68
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Individual Stock Unit), continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
ham Post Office FAD: I
16/06/1999 CAP:11 BP-O1
ps on Hand
DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
178
3.70
436
#** END OF REPORT ***
Note:
If you want to re-declare the stamps on hand, refer to page 71.
Well done!
Individual Stock Unit.
8 Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
You have declared the (non First and Second class) postage stanrps held in your
@1CL WORKBOOK i0
Page 66
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System. Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (Individual Stock Unit) ee a
The final stage of the declaration process is to declare the Cash on Hand. This MUST be
declared last, as the declarations of stamps and stock will automatically adjust the cash figure,
any adjustments or discrepancies are accepted eg if a declaration reduces the number of stamps
you hold, your cash will be credited accordingly.
In the following example you have counted, and wish to declare the following Cash on Hand:
£14.43
2p £22.26
Coins § £40.15
Coins 10p £85.10
Coins 20p £94.00
Coins 50p £150.50
Coins £1 £453.00
C £2 £340.00
Notes £5 £2560.00
Notes £10 £3520.00
Notes £20 £2120.00
Notes £50 £400.00
Notes £100 £200.00
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There are two icons for the declaration
of Stamps and Cash that can be used
with Individual Stock Units.
2. Touch the Decl Cash icon, or Press F) on the keyboard.
© 1cL WORKBOOK 10
Page 67
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (Individual Stock Unit), continued D ees
The Declare Cash on Hand menu is
displayed. The procedure for declaring
the Cash on Hand is similar to the Daily
Cash Declaration function.
3. Type the cash declarations listed on page 67, Check the amount entered and Press ENTER
on the keyboard after each entry.
Note:
If an incorrect multiple is entered eg £26.16 of 50p coins, the Horizon system will display
an error message. Acknowledge the message and re-enter the correct amount.
On completion of all the cash declarations:
4, Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen will be
displayed if the total value of all the
cash disagrees with the system derived
total. The message displayed indicates
that a discrepancy exists.
Continuing will present a list of
discrepancies for confirmation.
I
I I
i
Note:
If there is no loss or gain associated with the declaration, the system goes to the Produce
Report screen. Follow the instructions from step 7,
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 68
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref, PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (individual Stock Unit), continued Dates ee
Note:
Any discrepancy identified during this process will result in a loss or gain transaction
being recorded by the system. The total of all the loss and gain transactions will be shown
separately at the top of the Trial and Final Balance reports. The NETvalue of the
discrepancies will be shown in the Payments Table of the Cash Account Report.
The Discrepancies screen will indicate
the size of the discrepancy.
At this stage you must acknowledge the
discrepancy by touching the Confirm
green tick icon.
Note:
Tf you are not happy to accept the
discrepancy, the procedure must be
completed. You can then investigate
the cause of the discrepancy and
redeclare the cash held.
6. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed
giving you the choice of producing a
report on the printer or previewing one
on screen.
7. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The report will now be produced from the counter printer and will look similar to the one
shown overleaf.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 69
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Declare Cash (Individual Stock Unit), continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.8
9° BND OF REPORT **
3456X,
Feltham Post Office PAD: 12.
19:05 16/06/1999 CAP BP:OL SU:BB
‘Declared Cash
DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
Coins ip 14.43
Coins 2p 22.26
Coins Sp 40.15
Coins 10p 85.10
Coins 20p 94.00
Coins $0p 150.50
Coins £1 453.00
Coins £2 340.00
2560.00
s 3820.00
Notes £20 2120.00
Notes £50 400.00
Notes £100 200.00
TOTALS 9999.44
I
I
Note:
Well done!
You have declared the cash held in your Stock Unit.
If you want to re-declare the Cash On Hand, refer to page 71.
8. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
WORKBOOK 16
Page 70
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Re-declare Stamps or Cash on Hand (Individual one
Stock Unit) sues &
During the declaration of the Stamps on Hand or the Cash on Hand, you may view a
discrepancy on the system that you are not happy to accept. If this is the case, once the
declaration has been completed, you can investigate the discrepancy. If you then find that the
stamps or cash were declared incorrectly, they can be re-declared. The Horizon system will
remember the volume or values of the stamps or cash previously declared, allowing you to
overwrite the existing declaration on the system.
In the following example the stamps declared earlier were incorrect. You have re-counted the
stamps in the Stock Unit and found that a sheet of 39p stamps were not included in the original
declaration. Therefore the total of 39p stamps need to be increased to 242.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Dect Stamps icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
The Declare Stamps on Hand screen is
displayed. The stamps declared earlier
can be seen on screen.
To edit the 39p stamps declared, you
miust move to page 3 of the list.
3. Touch the Down green arrow icon twice, or Press PAGE DOWN twice on the keyboard.
The 39p stamps declared earlier can
now be overwritten with the correct
quantity held.
4, Select the correct stamp value to be edited by Touching the stamp value on screen, or
Pressing the ENTER key until the correct stamp value is highlighted.
© ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 71
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System. Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Re-declare Stamps or Cash on Hand (individual pate
Stock Unit), continued
5. Type 242 (the actual quantity of 39p stamps held).
6. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen will be
displayed if the system still indicates
that a discrepancy exists.
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Discrepancies screen will indicate
the size of the discrepancy.
In this example the discrepancy has
reduced from 4 £77.74 loss to a gain of
£0.26, This corresponds to the increase
of 200 x 39 p stamps (£78).
If you still wish to investigate the
discrepancy, then the same procedure
can be carried out,
&. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report screen is displayed.
9. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The report will be produced from the counter printer and reflects the additional 200 x 39p
stamps.
10. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Weil done!
You have re-deciared the stamps held in your Stock Unit.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 72
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Herizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Individual Steck Unit) and pate
roll over the Stock Unit i
With all the declarations having been made and the discrepancies accepted, you are now ready
to produce a Trial Balance report for the Stock Unit.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Bal Report icon, = or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The system will now perform various checks automatically. For example:
- Have all Daily/Weekly summaries been taken? If not the Horizon system lists all those
reports not yet produced.
- Are there any negative stock items in the Stock Unit? This would generally indicate a
Remittance In or a Transfer In that had not been completed on the system.
Are there any RD Cheques, POCL Cheques or Vouchers in the Stock Unit? These
should be moved into the Suspense Account and the item adjusted to zero in the
Stock Unit.
- Are there any discrepancies in the Stock Unit?
In this example all summaries have been taken and there were no negative stock items or RD
Cheques, POCL Cheques or Vouchers in the Stock Unit. However the system has found a
minor discrepancy which had been accepted earlier.
rene hee
ead 4
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen is
displayed. The system informs you that
1 or more declarations do not match the
system derived figures.
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 73
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Herizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Individual Stock Unit) and Date: 29/07/99
~ ® . issue: 2.0
roll over the Stock Unit, continued
I The Discrepancies list is displayed. If
you have made a series of different
D I stamps and cash declarations, the
discrepancies shown may not reflect the
actual state of the Stock Unit. In which
case the Trial Balance report should be
produced, this will then show the actual
state of the Stock Unit.
In this example, you will accept the
minor discrepancies indicated.
4. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard,
The system will now commit the
discrepancies and after a short delay, the
Produce Report screen is displayed.
Before the Stock Unit can be rolled
over into the next CAP or BP, the report
must either be printed or previewed on
I screen.
Note:
Cash Account Period (CAP) denotes which accounting week you are in during the
current financial year.
Balance Period (BP) a portion of a CAP. In periods of high turnover there maybe two
balance periods during a single Cash Account Period.
5. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Trial Balance Report will be printed on the counter printer.
You must check the entries on the report to ensure that you are happy with it.
If you are unhappy with the figures on the report, you can activate the Complete icon (F16) and
then adjust the stock holdings and re-declare the Stamps and Cash from the Stock Balancing
menu.
ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 74
POL00090452
POLO00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Individual Stock Unit) and Pate: 07
roll over the Stock Unit, continued
In this example, you are happy with the report and wish to roll the Stock Unit over into the next
Cash Account Period.
6. Touch the Roll Over icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
Aol Over Fiz
The system will now ask whether you
wish to roll over the Stock Unit into
the next CAP or the next BP.
In this example you are required to roll
over the Stock Unit into the next CAP.
7. Touch the Next CAP icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
‘The system will now carry out various checks and procedures that are required to roll over the
Stock Unit into the next Cash Account Period.
This will take a short period of time, at the end of which the Final Balance Report will be
produced on the counter printer.
‘This must be signed and datestamped and retained in the office.
Well done!
You have balanced and rolled over an Individual Stock Unit into the next CAP.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 75
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATA/43/002
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit declarations Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
With a Shared Stock Unit the declaration process is slightly ditferent from that of the Individual
Stock Unit. With the flexibility that the Shared Stock Unit offers ie a number of individuals
using the same stock at the same time, a Shared Stock Unit can be balanced in one of two ways:
~ The Stamps and Cash can be declared in one go, similar to the Individual Stock Unit, with a
single Declaration Identity number. The stock can be adjusted rather than declared.
~ The Stock, Stamps and Cash can be declared in several portions ie the contents of the safe
{or bulk) can be declared early in the day, with the stock and cash in use at the counter
declared as each counter position is withdrawn. Each portion of Stock, Stamps and Cash
must be declared with a different Declaration Identity number.
If the first method is to be used a Balance Snapshot can again be used in the balance process to
help in the physical check of all stock held in the Stock Unit. A stock adjustment can then be
curried out on the system to ensure that the system reflects the actual contents of the Stock
Unit.
The main advantage of the second method is that the balance process can be started during
quict periods of the day. The contents of the safe (bulk) may be declared early in the day with
a Declaration Identity number unique to the safe, for example 10. The counter may be
operating with two small portions of stock and cash. One of these may be withdrawn in
mid-afternoon and the Stock, Stamps and Cash declared with a different Declaration Identity
number, for example 11. This would then leave only a small proportion of Stock, Stamps and
Cash to be declared at close of business with a different Declaration Identity number, for
example 12. When the Balance Report is ready to be produced the system will then add
together the declarations for Stock, Stamps and Cash ie the stamps declared with the identity
numbers 10 + 11 + 12 would equal the Stock Unit holdings of Stock, Stamps and Cash.
A mixture of the two methods can also be employed, with a single adjustment of stock carried
out at the close of business, with the Stamps and Cash declared, (with different Declaration
Identity numbers), at various points throughout the day.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 76
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stock (Shared Stock Unit) pate,
In the following example the contents of the safe (bulk) will be declared using the Declaration
Identity number 10, Later in the day the declarations for other portions of the Stock Unit
would be made with different Declaration Identity numbers.
Note:
{f you prefer te carry out a stock adjustment refer to page 94.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
There are various icons for the
declaration of Stamps, Stock and Cash
for the Stock Unit.
Sema
Ce 8 FEE
2. Touch the Deci Stock icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
‘The Declarations picklist is displayed.
The system indicates that no other
declarations have yet been made for this
Stock Unit.
Once other declarations have been made
they can be edited by selecting the
declaration from the picklist. Refer to
page 92.
In this example a new declaration will
be made.
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 77
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stock (Shared Stock Unit), continued D ates 4 Mer
The system will now display a message
saying that the Stock on Hand list is
being prepared.
After a short delay, the Declare Stock
on Hand menu is displayed. The
quantity and totals of each stock item
held in this portion of the Stock Unit
can now be declared on the system.
4, Using the Top, Bottom, Up and Down green arrow icons, Select in urn the product held in
this portion of the Stock Unit.
5. Type the Quantity or value of the product held.
Check the quantity entered is correct before continuing.
6. Press ENTER on the keyboard to move on to the next entry.
Repeat the process above for each item of stock held in this portion of the Stock Unit.
On completion:
7. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
The Identity screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter the
Declaration Identity number for this
portion of the Stock Unit.
Tn this example the Declaration Identity
iS) 3 : number is 10.
©
Note:
If the Stock Unit has been divided into several portions, then the Stock on Hand in each
portion of the Stock Unit MUST be declared with a different Declaration Identity number.
®1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 78
4,
HORIZON SYSTEM
Section 2: Declare Stock (Shared Stock Unit), continued
Balancing using the Horizon System
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref; PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Assue: 2.0
8. Type the identity number 10.
Check the identity number entered is correct before continuing.
9. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
required.
oll
I emp os eatnare
10. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The report will now be produced from the counter printer. The figures that appear on the report
will correspond to the products declared. The report will look similar to the one shown below.
After a short delay, the Produce Report
screen is displayed.
In this example a printed report is
Feltham Post Office FAD: 123456X
18:36 16/06/1999 CAPL1 BP:01 SU:AA
Stock on Hand
User: CASOOL Declaration ID: 10
DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
Game blue 4.00
Game dealers 4.00
Game green 4.00
Game keepers 4.00
‘TV stmp £2 50.00
TV sump £3 125.00
Ist class sump 260.00
2nd class stmp 190.00
A/gram pict pok 5.98
A/gram sngle 3.96
Bus air/pek 300g 5.98
Bus air/pck S00g 7.00
Int rep coupon
Sipck C4 euro
TOTAL:
eae E
'D OF REPORT ***
ICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 79
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stock (Shared Stock Unit), continued BD ate: 29/07
LL. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Note:
This procedure would then be duplicated for each portion of the Stock Unit with a
different Declaration Identity number.
‘Well dene!
You have declared the stock held in this portion of the Shared Stock Unit.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 80
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Shared Stock Unit} oa
In the previous example the contents of the safe (bulk) was declared early in the day with the
Declaration Identity number 10. Any stamps or cash held in the safe can also be declared at the
same time.
In the following example you have counted the stamps in the safe and wish to declare the
following, against the identifier 10:
ip stamps 84 39p stamps 150
2p stamps 74 43p stamps 73
4p stamps 96 44p stamps 67
Sp stamps 93 50p stamps 98
6p stamps 81 63p stamps 89
7p stamps 34 64 p stamps 7
10p stamps 113 £1.00 stamps 77
20p stamps 132 £1.50 stamps 62
30p stamps 79 £2.00 stamps 90
31p stamps 84 £3.00 starnps 120
37p stamps 62 £5.00 stamps 100
38p stamps 53
Note:
First and second class stamps are treated as stock items.
From the Desktop:
I. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
I There are various icons for the
declaration of stamps, stock and cash
for the Stock Unit.
2. Touch the Decl Stamp icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
CCL WORKBOOK 10
Page 81
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Shared Stock Unit), continued
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref; PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
i
The Declarations picklist is displayed.
The system indicates that no other
declarations have yet been made for this
Stock Unit.
Once other declarations have been made
they can be edited by selecting the
declaration from the picklist. Refer to
page 92.
In this example a new declaration will
be made.
keyboard.
The Declare Stamps on Hand screen is
displayed. The total value of each of
the stamps held can now be declared.
On completion:
4. Type the quantities of stamps held, listed on page 81, check the quantity entered and Press
ENTER on the keyboard after each entry. (The Edit icon can also be used, a number keypad
then appears on screen allowing you to enter the cash declarations).
5, Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
OICL
WORKBOOK 10
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Stamps (Shared Stock Unit), continued Pate nets
The Identity screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter a declaration
identity number.
In this example the Declaration Identity
number is 10.
Note:
If the Stock Unit has been divided into several portions, the stamps on hand in each
portion of the Stock Unit MUST be declared with a different Declaration Identity number.
6. Type the Declaration identity number 10
Cheek the identity number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
After a short delay, the Produce Report
screen is displayed.
I In this example a printed report is
I tequired.
I
&. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
®ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 83
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System. Ref: PATH/43/062
: Declare Stamps (Shared Stock Unit), continued pate
Section
The report will now be produced from the counter printer and will look similar fo the one
shown below.
Feltham Post Office BAD: 123456X)
[8:26 17/06/1999 CAP:11 BP:01 SU:AA
Stamps on Hand
User: CASO01 Declaration ID: 10
DESCRIPTION AMOUNT
ip 0.84
2p 1.48
4p 3.84
Sp 465
6p 4.86
Ip 3.8
10p 11.30
20p 26.40
30p 23.70
3ip 26.04
3p 22.94
38p 20.14
39p $8.50
43p 31.39
29.48
49.00
56.07
4544
77.00
93.00
180.60
360.00
500.00
TOTAL: 1629.85
#** END OP REPORT ***
9. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have declared the postage stamps held in this portion of the Shared Stock Unit.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 84
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (Shared Stock Unit) pate
In the previous two examples, the stock and stamps in the safe (bulk) have been declared early
in the day with the Declaration Identity number 10. The cash held in the safe will now also be
declared.
In the following example you have counted, and wish to declare the following cash on hand in:
Coins Ip £5.00
Coins 2p £10.00
Coins Sp £20.00
Coins 10p £45.00
Coins 20p £50.00
Coins SOp £100.00
Coins £1 £250.00
Coins £2 £200.00
Notes £5 £1500.00
Notes £10 £3500.00
Notes £20 £2000.00
Notes £50 £500.00
Notes £100 £100.00
From the Desktop:
1. Teuch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
I The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
_ There are various icons for the
declaration of Stamps, Stock and Cash
for the Stock Unit.
2. Touch the Decl Cash icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Ich WORKBOOK 10
Page 85
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing asing the Horizon System Refs PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (Shared Steck Unit), continued Dates
The Declarations picklist is displayed.
tem indicates that no other
declarations have yet been made for this
Se oe Stock Unit.
Once other declarations have been made
they can be edited by selecting the
declaration from the picklist. Refer to
page 92.
In this example a new declaration will
be made.
See
as
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Declare Cash on Hand menu is
displayed.
4, Type the cash declarations listed on page 85, check the amount entered and Press ENTER
on the keyboard after each entry.
Note:
If an incorrect multiple is entered eg £26.10 of 50p coins, the Herizon system will display
an error message. Acknowledge the message and re-enter the correct amount.
On completion:
5, Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
@ ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 86
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2; Declare Cash (Shared Steck Unit), continued Pate: nes
The Identity screen is displayed. At
this point you must enter a declaration
identity number.
In this example the Declaration Identity
I nunber is 10.
Note:
If the Stock Unit has been divided into several portions, the Cash on Hand in each
portion of the Stock Unit MUST be declared with a different identity number.
6. Type the Declaration Identity number 10.
Check the identity number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
After a short delay, the Produce Report
screen is displayed.
In this example a printed report is
required,
8. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
© ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 87
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Declare Cash (Shared Stock Unit), continued ees
The report will now be produced from the counter printer and will look similar to the one
shown below.
Feltham Post Office FAD: §23456X
16/06/1999 CAP:11 BP:OL SULAA
Declared Cash
User: CASOOL Declaration ID: 16
IDESCRIPTION AMOUNT
Coins Ip 5.00
Coins 2p 10.00
Coins Sp 20.40
Coins 10p 45.00
Coins 20p 50.00
Coins 50p 116.00
Coins £1 250.00
Coins £2 200.00
Notes £5 1500.00
Notes £10 3500.00
Notes £20 2000.00
: Notes £50 500.00
I
Notes £100 100.00
TOTAL: 280.00
*#* END OF REPORT ***
9, Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have declared the cash held in your portion of the Stock Unit.
ORCL WORKBOOK 16
Page 88
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit new declaration saa
In the three previous examples the contents of the safe were declared early in the day against
the Declaration Identity number 10. One of the two counter positions has now been withdrawn
from serving the customer. The contents of the Stock, Stamps and Cash can now be declared,
this time with the Declaration Identity number 11.
In the following example you have counted the cash in this portion of the Stock Unit and will
declare the cash against the Declaration Identity number 11:
Coins Ip £2.41
Coins 2p £3.58
Coins Sp £8.45
Coins 10p £14.40
Coins 20p £26.20
Coins 50p £34.50
Coins £1 £88.00
Coins £2 £66.00
Notes £5 £875.00
Notes £10 £1320.00
Notes £20 £1460.00
Notes £50 £200.00
Notes £100 £100.00
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard,
‘The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Dec] Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The Declarations picklist is displayed.
The system indicates that one other
declaration has been made with the
Declaration Identity number 10.
Once other declarations have been made
they can be edited by selecting the
declaration from the picklist. Refer to
page 92.
in this example a new declaration will
be made.
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 89
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizen System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit new declaration, continued eee
The Declare Cash on Hand menu is
displayed. The process for declaring
the Cash on Hand is similar to the Daily
Cash Declaration function.
4. Type in the cash declarations listed on page 89, check the amount entered and Press ENTER
on the keyboard after each entry.
Note:
If an incorrect multiple is entered e.g. £26.10 of 0p coins, the Horizon system will display
an error message. Acknowledge the message and reenter the correct amount.
On completion:
5. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
I The Identity screen is displayed. At
I this point you must enter a declaration
I identity sumber.
number is 11,
]
In this example the Declaration Identity
I
I
I
6. Type the Declaration Identity number 11
Check the identity number entered is correct before continuing.
7. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
After a short delay, the Produce Report screen is displayed,
In this example a printed report is required.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 90
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit new declaration, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/97/99
Issue: 2.0
7. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
8. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
Well done!
Unit.
You have made a second declaration of the cash held in this portion of the Shared Stock
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 1
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Edit a Shared Stock Unit declaration eae
Occasionally you may need to edit a previous declaration made in a Shared Stock Unit. This
may happen if you have declared the contents of the safe earlier and you now wish to remove
some stock from the safe so that it can be sold at the counter. It may also be the result of an
incorrect declaration and after investigating a discrepancy, you may be required to edit a
previous declaration.
In the following example the stock declaration made against the identity number 11 will be
edited to amend a previous declaration of First Class stamps.
From the Desktop:
\. Touck the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the Decl Stock icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The Declarations menu is displayed.
The system indicates which stock
declarations have already been made
and offers you the option of making a
New Declaration.
In this example the declaration made.
earlier with the Declaration Identity
number 11 will be edited.
3. Select the Declaration Identity number 11
4. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
After a short delay the Stock on Hand
menu is displayed with the previous
declarations made against Declaration
Identity number 11.
eee,
5. Select the item to be edited and Type the quantity or value of the product.
This automatically overwrites the previous quantity or value and substitutes the new one.
eICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 92
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 2: Edit a Shared Stock Unit declaration, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/67/99
Issue: 2.0
On completion of all changes:
§. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The system displays the Produce Report screen.
6. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have successfully edited a Shared Stock Unit declaration.
7. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
©1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 93
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit adjust stock on hand
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
If you prefer, you can make an adjustment of stock in a Shared Stock Unit. The process for
doing so is identical to that described on pages 61 - 62 for an Individual Stock Unit.
A physical check of all stock held (including First and Second Class stamps) must be carried
out and compared to the system-derived figures, This can be done using the Balance Snapshot.
Any discrepancies found can then be amended on the Balance Snapshot and the stock can be
adjusted on the Horizon system to reflect the actual stock held.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The Stock Balancing menu is displayed.
2. Touch the Adjust Stock icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
The system will now display a message
saying that a Stock on Hand list is being
prepared.
After a short delay, the Adjust Stock on
Hand menu is displayed. The
quantity/totals of each stock item can
now be compared with the system
figures and adjusted (if required) to
reflect the actual stock held.
3. Compare the stock on hand against the system and Adjust as necessary.
The Adjust Stock on Hand sereen is displayed.
4. Type the actual quantity of First Class stamps held.
Check the quantity held is correct before continuing.
5. Press ENTER on the keyboard, or Touch the green tick icon (if using the touchpad).
6. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
Note:
When the Finish icon is activated, the system records a balancing transaction against
Cash for each item adjusted.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 94
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Shared Stock Unit adjust stock on hand D aaeMeds
The system will now commit the list and then return to the Stock Balancing menu.
Well done!
You have adjusted the Stock on Hand in a Shared Stock Unit.
©1ch WORKBOOK 10
Page 95
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Check Shared Stock Unit declarations Pe oe
Before you produce a Balance Report for the Stock Unit, you should check that all portions of
the Stock Unit have been declared, ie there is a declaration of Stamps, Stock and Cash for each
portion of the Stock Unit. This is especially useful if a number of staff have a responsibility for
declaring the portion of the Stock Unit they are using. You can then check to ensure that they
have made their declarations before the Stock Unit is balanced.
Note:
The declaration of stock is not mandatory, it may be carried owt as an adjustment.
From the Desktop:
1. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
or Press F9 on the keyboard.
After a short delay, the Declarations
screen is displayed. All the
declarations made for Stamps, Stock
and Cash, for this Shared Stock Unit are
listed,
The details indicate who made the
declarations, when they were made and
on which system in the post office
(node) they were made.
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
Well done!
You have checked the declarations made so far in this Stock Unit.
WORKBOOK 16
Page 96
6,
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Shared Stock Unit) and roll Date: 29/67/99
: Tout Issue: 2.0
over the Stock Unit
With all the necessary declarations made, you are now ready to produce a Balance report for
the Stock Unit.
Note:
ALL other users attached to the Shared Stock Unit MUST be logged off.
From the Desktop menu:
1, Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Confirm Declarations screen is
displayed. The system is checking to
ensure that all other users attached to
the Shared Stock Unit are logged off.
You are also informed that all required
I declarations have been completed and
I continuing will list them for
I information.
ee
ee
3. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Declarations screen is displayed
showing the declarations made so far
for Stamps, Stock and Cash.
The details indicate who made the
declarations, when they were made and
on which system in the post office
(node) they were made.
©ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 97
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Shared Stock Unit) and roll
over the Stock Unit, continued
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
aii!
S. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on
Note:
4. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
_ discrepancies and produce the Balance
The discrepancies are recorded as loss or gain transaction and the total of each is shown.
at the top of the Trial and Final Balance reports. The NET value of the discrepancies will
be shown in the Payments Table of the Cash Account Repert.
6. Touch the OK. green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
The system will now check to see if,
based on the declarations, there are any
discrepancies in the Stock Unit.
If any discrepancies are found, the
Confirm Loss/Gain screen is displayed.
The system indicates that discrepancies
have been found. Continuing will
present a list of them for confirmation.
if there are NO discrepancies, the
Produce Report screen is displayed,
(continue the procedure from step 7).
the keyboard.
The Discrepancies are now listed.
At this point you can accept the
Report, by activating the OK green tick
icon.
However if you do not wish to accept
the discrepancies then you can activate
the Riposte icon and redeclare Stamps,
stock or Cash as appropriate.
®ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 98
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 2: Produce a Balance Report (Shared Stock Unit) and roll Dp ates a on
over the Stock Unit, continued
The system will now commit the
discrepancies and after a short delay, the
Produce Report screen is displayed.
Before the Stock Unit can be rolled
over into the next CAP or BP, the report
must be either printed or previewed on
screen,
7. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard,
The Trial Balance Report will be printed on the counter printer. You should now check the
entries on the report to ensure that you are happy with it. Even after producing the report, you
can still re-declare Stamps, Stock and Cash by activating the Complete icon.
In this example, you are going to roll over the Stock Unit into the next CAP.
8. Touch the Roll Over icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
The system will now ask you whether
you wish to roll over the Stock Unit
into the next CAP or the next BP.
9. Touch the Next CAP icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The system will now carry out the various checks and procedures that are required to roll over
the Stock Unit into the next Cash Account Period. This will take a short period of time and
the Final Balance Report will be produced on the counter printer.
Well dene!
You have produced a Balance Report and rolled over the Stock Unit.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 99
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 100
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Activity Sheet 2 Workbook 10
If there are any questions you are unsure of, read Workbook 10 Section 2 again. All of the
questions are practical and require you to use the Horizon system.
Note:
Lf you are completing these exercises in the pest office, ensure that the Horizon system is
in Training Mode.
1. Produce a Balance Snapshot report for Stock Unit BB.
n
You have received the following error notice, National Savings Withdrawal, Amount
£45.00. Process it,
3. Declare the following stamps for Stock Unit BB:
Ip stamps £178 39p stamps £32.76
2p stamps £3.64 43p stamps £40.42
4p stamps £4.36 S0p stamps £53.50
Sp stamps £5.25 63p stamps £45.36
6p stamps £5.34 £1.00 stamps £87.00
10p stamps £1.50 stamps £180.00
30p stamps £2.00 stamps £432.00
31p stamps £3.00 stamps £420.00
37p stamps £5.00 stamps £490.00
4. Adjust the First Class stamps holding on Stock Unit BB to 1500.
5. Declare the following Cash for Stock Unit BB:
Coins Ip £15.00 Notes £5 £2500.00
Coins 2p £20.00 Notes £10 £3260.00
Coins Sp £35.00 Notes £20 £2800.00
Coins 1Op £80.00 Notes £50 £100.00
Coins 20p £150.00 Notes £100 £100.00
Coins 50p £200.00
Coins £1 £450.00
Coins £2 £350.00
© ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 101
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
GICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 102
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM. Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
HORIZON SYSTEM
SECTION 3 - CASH ACCOUNT REPORT
INTRODUCTION
Introduction:
This section describes the actions and procedures required to produce the office Cash Account
report. This element of the procedure is rather procedural, as the Stock Unit balance is the
critical element of the office balance. The system will use the figures from the Stock Unit
balances to prepare the office Cash Account report.
“ ©1CL WORKBOOK 10
Page 103
HORIZON SYSTEM
Batancing using the Horizon System
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.6
@ICL
WORKBOOK 10
Page 104
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 3: Cash Account overview
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Cash Account procedure breakdown
Balance all Stock Units
Pages 61 - 75 (individual Stock Units),
76 - 99 (Shared Stock Units)
Roll over any inactive Stock Units
(not required in single Stock Unit offices)
Page 106
I
Print Office Snapshot
(optional)
{ Page 108
Print the weekly office reporis
{compare against Trial Cash Account)
Page 110
Produce Trial Office
Cash Account report
Page 113
Create a correction Stock Unit & roll over
into next CAP (if required)
Page 115
Produce Final Office
Cash Account report
Page 113
Once the Stock Units in the office have been balanced, the Cash Account can be produced.
The procedure above shows the steps that need to be taken to produce the Cash Account. The
examples shown in section 3 of this Workbook detail how each step is carried out. ff further
information is required refer to the Horizon System User Guide
© ICL
WORKBOOK 16
Page 105
HORIZON SYSTEM
Account Period
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 3: Roll over Inactive Stock Units into the next Cash
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Bate: 29/07/99
issue: 2.6
previous week’s balance figures.
Note:
Unit or the roll over will fail.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Office Balancing icon,
Occasionally during the Stock Unit and office Balance procedure, you may be required to roll
over a Stock Unit that has not been used at afl during the current accounting week, Since these
Stock Units have remained inactive since the last balance, they can be rolled over using the
Before the roll over can take place, you must ensure that no-one is attached to the Stock
or Press F8 on the keyboard.
cop me rare
The Office Balancing menu is
displayed. There is also an icon for
rolling over an Inactive Stock Unit.
Press F9 on the keyboard.
The Select a Stock Unit to roll as
inactive screen is displayed. The
system prompts you to select the
Inactive Stock Unit that will be rolled
over.
In this example Stock Unit CC has not
been used during the current accounting
week, so it can be rolled over as an
Inactive Stock Unit
Oich
Page 106
WORKBOOK 10
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 3: Roll over Inactive Stock Units into the next Cash
Account Period, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/(002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
3. Select Stock Unit CC.
4. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
rolling over.
Balancing menu.
Well done!
You have relied over an Inactive Stock Unit using the Horizon system.
The Horizon system will check to ensure there are no users currently attached to the Stock
Unit. If no-one is attached to Stock Unit CC, the screen will now indicate that the Stock Unit is
Once the system has completed the roll over procedure, the system returns to the Office
© ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 107
HORIZON SYSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 3: Produce an Office Snapshot Report
POLO0090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
This is an optional report.
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Office Balancing icon,
Once all Stock Units in the post office have been successfully rolled over into the next Cash
Account Period, the Office Snapshot Report can be produced. It can be used to check against
the office weekly reports, although the Trial Cash Account can also be used for this purpose.
or Press F8 on the keyboard.
‘Satie tt
‘Ss ROE
‘Wismais,
eeraares
The Office Balancing menu is
displayed. There is an icon for
producing an Office Snapshot Report.
2. Touch the Office Snpshot icon,
or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The system will now prepare the Office
Snapshot Report. After a delay, the
Produce Report screen is displayed.
‘The options available are similar to all
other Produce Report screens.
In this example a printed copy of the
Snapshot is required.
3. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Sic.
WORKBOOK 10
Page 108
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 3: Produce an Office Snapshot Repert, continued ete,
The Office Snapshot Report will now be printed on the counter printer. The report totals the
Stock Unit holdings of Stamps, Stock and Cash for ALL Stock Units in the office. The
Snapshot below shows the start of a typical Office Snapshot.
Feltham Post Office PAD: 123456X
18:37 16/06/1999 CAPT
Office Snapshot
**4Discrepancies in this Account***
*Di 7B
iscrepancy OVE
“Discrepancy UNDER
“Total discrepancy
RAR ERA HAI EE
Value Stock & MOP Volume Value
Sash 6144052
Cash
Sheyue
Cheque
OB Cheque to CRU
Non Chee OB Cheques
MOP
Mano TV Fee 470
Mano
Colour TV Fee AGB
Cole
BBC TV Stmp £1 360
BBC TV Licence Semp
Phil Other
First Day Cov 30
Pres Pack
RM Stamp Card 15
PHILATELIC ITEMS
Ist Class Stamp 3612
ete ete ete
4, Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
‘Well done!
You have produced an Office Snapshot Report using the Horizon system.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 109
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Secti . 0 Date: 29/07/99
Seetion I: Office Weekly reports Tssue: 2.0
Once all the Stock Units have been balanced and rolled over into the next Cash Account
Period, the Office Weekly reports can be produced.
in this example the P&A P2311MA Report will be produced (on the Ad report printer).
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Reports icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Office Weekly Reports menu is
displayed.
The nature of the business conducted in
the outlet during the accounting week
will determine which reports are
required
or Press F5 on the keyboard.
The Produce Report sereen is displayed
for the Report.
®ICL WORKBOOK 106
Page 110
HORIZON
YSTEM
Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 1: Office Weekly reports, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/602
Date: 29/07/99
issue: 2.0
4. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
Screen messages will be displayed for a few seconds, informing you that the report is being
prepared and then printed. The report will be produced on the Ad report printer. The report
reproduced below shows the Pension and Allowance benefits paid during the current Cash
Account Period. It details each P&A group and summarises the total number of benefits paid
by volume and total.
ADDRESS:
MOD ARMY
MOD Ind Iniy
MOD AIR
Chila/One Pasent
War Pension
Dis Living AD
Family Credit
DOH.
Pension/ine Supp
scone Support
Ret Pension/ Al
For
Fume
Use
TOTALS:
MILK TOKENS:
SIGNATURE.
ind Inj/Death Benefit
PENSIONS AND ALLOWANCES
Feltham Post Office OFFICE CODE:
CIA WEEK NO:
WEEK ENDING: 16/06/1999
TIME: 19.30
[This summary should be dispatched with the CASH ACCOUNT.
GROUP NUMBER OF ORDERS ‘TOTAL AMOUNT
NO. FPST/PSST PENSIONS ALLOWANCES £ op
1 3 125.00
2 8 0.00
3 3 270.00
4 9 0.00
5 % 1436.75
6 2 457.00
7 0 0.00
8 35 s
9 c)
10 234
h cea
2 8
3 65
i4 2
15 0
i 8
7 e
18 ®
° 437 179
57
SUMMARY P2311MA
123456X%
i
@1Ch
WORKBOOK 10
Page 111
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 1: Office Weekly reports, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
The Horizon system returns to the Office Weekly Reports menu.
Weil done!
You have produced an Office Weekly repart.
5. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 112
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref; PATH/43/002
Section 3: Produce the Cash Account report pate
Once the Office Weekly reports have been produced, the Trial Cash Account can be taken.
From the Desktop menu:
\. Touch the Office Balancing icon, or Press F8 on the keyboard.
The Office Balancing menu is
displayed.
‘Sean eM
areas
or Press F6 on the keyboard.
2. Touch the CA Report icon,
oA Report:
The system will now prepare the office
cash account. After a delay, the
Repo Produce Report screen will be
displayed.
3. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 16
Page 113
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 3: Produce the Cash Account report, continued Dates ee “
The Trial Cash Account report will now be printed on the Ad report printer. The system will
then return to the Produce Report screen.
The Office Weekly reports must be checked against the Trial Cash Account. If you are happy
to accept the report the Roll Over icon can be activated and the office will roll over into the
next Cash Account Period.
If during this check procedure you find a transaction that has not been carried out on the
Horizon system then a Correction Stock Unit can be created, refer to the procedure on page
115. Once the Correction Stock Unit has been balanced and rolled over into the next Cash
Account Period, the Trial Cash Account must be re-produced.
4. Touch the Roll Over icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard,
I The Confirm Rollover screen is
: I displayed. The Warning message
Bile I prompts you to check that all Office
Accounting activities have taken place.
rolling over into the next Cash Account
Period and the final Cash Account
report being produced.
i
- I Continuing will result in the office
5. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
After a short delay, 2 copies of the Final Cash Account report are produced from the Ad printer,
Both must be signed and datestamped, one is retained in the post office for 6 years, the second
is forwarded to Chesterfield.
Well Done!
You have produced the Office Cash Account repert.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 114
POL00090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 3: Create a Correction Steck Unit to hold errors in the Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
Office Balance
During the Office Balance procedure, a member of staff may have rolled over their Stock Unit
having accepted a discrepancy. If the discrepancy is found after the Stock Unit is rolled over
(but before the Cash Account is produced), the Stock Unit cannot be amended, as the figures
have been accepted by the Horizon system. Since this discrepancy has been found, a new
Stock Unit can be created to hold the discrepancy so that it can be accounted for in the office
Cash Account, thereby allowing the office to balance. The discrepancy can then be transferred
back into the original Stock Unit on completion of the Cash Account.
If a correction Stock Unit is created in this way, the outlet manager must make a written note of
when and why the Stock Unit was created. The creation of a correction Stock Unit is exactly
the same as the creation of an Individual or Shared Stock Unit described in Workbook 9.
In the following example, a Green Giro has been paid out to the customer but not carried out on
the system. The cash was taken out of the Stock Unit causing a discrepancy of £50 at the end
of the week, The Stock Unit was balanced and rolled over into the next CAP with the
discrepancy, however the mistake has now been noticed. A Correction Stock Unit will now be
created so that the Giro will be registered with the Horizon system, creating a positive
discrepancy to offset the original one.
8%,
From the Desktop menu:
1. Touch the Administration icon, or Press F7 on the keyboard.
2. Tauck the Stock Unit icon, or Press FI on the keyboard.
3. Touch the Create icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
ry out the Giro transaction.
jer at the opposite end of the
In this example an Individual Stock Unit will be created toc
Correction Stock Units should always be created with an ident
alphabet, to avoid confusion. In this example ZZZ will be used.
4, Type Z2Z.
3. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
6. Touch the Individual icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
A message will now appear indicating that the Stock Unit has been successfully created.
7. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard,
The Stock Unit has now been created. However, before the transaction can be carried out, you
must attach yourself to it.
8. Touch the Attach icon, or Press F3 on the keyboard.
9. Touch Stock Unit ZZZ.
10. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
@ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 115
POLO0090452
POL00090452
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System Ref: PATH/43/002
Section 3: Create 2 Correction Stock Unit to hold errors in the pate
Office Balance, continued _
The Select a User to attach to Stock Unit ZZZ screen is displayed.
11, Select your user same from the picklist.
12. Touch the Select green tick icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
The Attached OK screen is displayed, indicating that you are now attached to Stock Unit ZZZ.
13. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
14. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The transaction can now be completed in Stock Unit ZZZ.
15. Touch the Transactions icon, or Press Fi on the keyboard.
16. Touch the Serve Customer icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
17. Touch the Green giro icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
18. Type £50.00
Check the amount is correct before continuing.
19. Touch the green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
20. Touch the Cash icon, or Press F15 on the keyboard.
21. Touch the Riposte Desktop icon, or Press HOME on the keyboard.
The Green Giro has now been completed on the Horizon system. The Stock Unit must now be
balanced. The Green Giros Weekly Report can be produced.
22. Produce the Green Giros Counter Weekly report and apply the cut-off.
The correction Stock Unit can now be balanced. There is no stock or cash in the Stock Unit.
However a declaration of stamps and cash is required.
23. Touch the Stock Balancing icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
24. Touch the Decl Stamp icon, or Press F2 on the keyboard.
25. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
26. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard,
27. Touch the Decl Cash icon, or Press Fl on the keyboard.
ICL WORKBOOK 10
Page 116
HORIZON SYSTEM Balancing using the Horizon System
Section 3: Create a Correction Stock Unit t hold errors in the
Office Balance, continued
POL00090452
POL00090452
Ref: PATH/43/002
Date: 29/07/99
Issue: 2.0
28. Touch the Finish green tick icon, or Press F] on the keyboard.
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen is displayed.
29. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Discrepancies screen is displayed.
30. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press F1 on the keyboard.
32. Touch the Bal Report icon, or Press F6 on the keyboard.
The Confirm Loss/Gain screen is displayed.
33. Touch the OK green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Discrepancies screen is displayed.
34. Touch the Confirm green tick icon, or Press FI on the keyboard.
35. Touch the Print icon, or Press F4 on the keyboard.
36. Touch the Rollover icon, or Press F12 on the keyboard.
This completes the process for correcting the office balance.
discrepancy, Stock Unit ZZZ can then be balanced and deleted.
Weil Dane!
Office Balance using the Horizon system.
31. Touch the Complete green tick icon, or Press F16 on the keyboard.
37. Touch the Next CAP green tick icon, or Press ENTER on the keyboard.
The Final Balance report for the Correction Stock Unit will be printed on the counter printer.
The Trial and Final Cash Account must now be reproduced (refer to page 113 - 114).
Once the office has rolled over into the next Cash Account Period, £50 cash can be transferred
from the Stock Unit with the discrepancy into Stock Unit ZZZ. This will cancel the original
You have created and balanced a Correction Stock Unit to hold errors found in the
@1ch WORKBOOK 10
Page 117
POL00090452
POL00090452